System and method for mining data

ABSTRACT

A system and method for extracting data, hereinafter referred to as MitoMine, that produces a strongly-typed ontology defined collection referencing (and cross referencing) all extracted records. The input to the mining process can be any data source, such as a text file delimited into a set of possibly dissimilar records. MitoMine contains parser routines and post processing functions, known as ‘munchers’. The parser routines can be accessed either via a batch mining process or as part of a running server process connected to a live source. Munchers can be registered on a per data-source basis in order to process the records produced, possibly writing them to an external database and/or a set of servers. The present invention also embeds an interpreted ontology based language within a compiler/interpreter (for the source format) such that the statements of the embedded language are executed as a result of the source compiler ‘recognizing’ a given construct within the source and extracting the corresponding source content. In this way, the execution of the statements in the embedded program will occur in a sequence that is dictated wholly by the source content. This system and method therefore make it possible to bulk extract free-form data from such sources as CD-ROMs, the web etc. and have the resultant structured data loaded into an ontology based system.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

This application is a continuation of application Ser. No. 10/357,290 filed on Feb. 3, 2003, titled “A System And Method For Mining Data,” which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/353,487 filed on Feb. 1, 2002, titled “Integrated Multimedia Intelligence Architecture,” both of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety for all that is taught and disclosed therein.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The data ingestion and conversion process is generally known as data mining, and the creation of robust systems to handle this problem is the subject of much research, and has spawned the creation of many specialized languages (e.g., Perl) intended to make this process easier. Unfortunately, while there have been some advances, the truth of the matter is that none of these ‘mining’ languages really provides anything more than a string manipulation library embedded into the language syntax itself. In other words, such languages are nothing more than shorthand for the equivalent operations written as a series of calls to a powerful subroutine library. A prerequisite for any complex data processing application, specifically a system capable of processing and analyzing disparate data sources, is a system that can convert the structured, semi-structured, and un-structured information sources into their equivalent representation in the target ontology, thereby unifying all sources and allowing cross-source analysis.

For example, in a current generation data-extraction script, the code involved in the extraction basically works its way through the text from beginning to end trying to recognize delimiting tokens and once having done so to extract any text within the delimiters and then assign it to the output data structure. When there is a one-to-one match between source data and target representation, this is a simple and effective strategy. As we widen the gap between the two, however, such as by introducing multiple inconsistent sources, increasing the complexity of the source, nesting information in the source to multiple levels, cross referencing arbitrarily to other items within the source, and distributing and interspersing the information necessary to determine an output item within a source, the situation rapidly becomes completely unmanageable by this technique, and highly vulnerable to the slightest change in source format or target data model. This mismatch is at the heart of all problems involving the need for multiple different systems to intercommunicate meaningful information, and makes conventional attempts to mine such information prohibitively expensive to create and maintain. Unfortunately for conventional mining techniques, much of the most valuable information that might be used to create truly intelligent systems comes from publishers of various types. Publishing houses make their money from the information that they aggregate, and thus are not in the least bit interested in making such information available in a form that is susceptible to standard data mining techniques. Furthermore, most publishers deliberately introduce inconsistencies and errors into their data in order both to detect intellectual property rights violations by others, and to make automated extraction as difficult as possible. Each publisher, and indeed each title from any given publisher, uses different formats, and has an arrangement that is custom tailored to the needs of whatever the publication is. The result is that we are faced with a variety of source formats on CD-ROMs, databases, web sites, and other legacy systems that completely stymie standard techniques for acquisition and integration. Very few truly useful sources are available in a nice neat tagged form such as XML and thus to rely on markup languages such as XML to aid in data extraction is a woefully inadequate approach in real-world situations.

One of the basic problems that makes the extraction process difficult is that the control-flow based program that is doing the extraction has no connection to the data itself (which is simply input) and must therefore invest huge amounts of effort extracting and keeping track of its ‘state’ in order to know what it should do with information at any given time. What is needed, then, is a system in which the content of the data itself actually determines the order of execution of statements in the mining language and automatically keeps track of the current state. In such a system, whenever an action was required of the extraction code, the data would ‘tell’ it to take that action, and all of the complexity would melt away. Assuming such a system is further tied to a target system ontology, the mining problem would become quite simple. Ideally, such a solution would tie the mining process to compiler theory, since that is most powerful formalized framework available for mapping source textual content into defined actions and state in a rigorous and extensible manner. It would also be desirable to have an interpreted language that is tied to the target ontology (totally different from the source format), and for which the order of statement execution could be driven by source data content

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

The system of this invention takes the data mining process to a whole new level of power and versatility by recognizing that, at the core of our past failings in this area, lies the fact that conventional control-flow based programming languages are simply not suited to the desired system, and must be replaced at the fundamental level a more flexible approach to software system generation. There are two important characteristics of the present invention that help create this paradigm shift. The first is that, in the preferred embodiment, the system of the present invention includes a system ontology such that the types and fields of the ontology can be directly manipulated and assigned within the language without the need for explicit declarations. For example, to assign a value to a field called “notes.sourceNotes=” of a type, the present invention would only require the statement “notes.sourceNotes=”. An ontology is an explicit formal specification of how to represent the objects, concepts and other entities that are assumed to exist in some area of interest and the relationships that hold among them. The second, and one of the most fundamental characteristics, is that the present invention gives up on the idea of a control-flow based programming language (i.e., one where the order of execution of statements is determined by the order of those statements within the program) in order to dramatically simplify the extraction of data from a source. In other words, the present invention represents a radical departure from all existing “control” notions in programming.

The present invention, hereinafter referred to as MitoMine, is a generic data extraction capability that produces a strongly-typed ontology defined collection referencing (and cross referencing) all extracted records. The input to the mining process tends to be some form of text file delimited into a set of possibly dissimilar records. MitoMine contains parser routines and post processing functions, known as ‘munchers’. The parser routines can be accessed either via a batch mining process or as part of a running server process connected to a live source. Munchers can be registered on a per data-source basis in order to process the records produced, possibly writing them to an external database and/or a set of servers. The present invention embeds an interpreted ontology based language within a compiler/interpreter (for the source format) such that the statements of the embedded language are executed as a result of the source compiler ‘recognizing’ a given construct within the source and extracting the corresponding source content. In this way, the execution of the statements in the embedded program will occur in a sequence that is dictated wholly by the source content. This system and method therefore make it possible to bulk extract free-form data from such sources as CD-ROMs, the web etc. and have the resultant structured data loaded into an ontology based system.

In the preferred embodiment, a MitoMine parser is defined using three basic types of information:

1) A named source-specific lexical analyzer specification

2) A named BNF specification for parsing the source

3) A set of predefined plug-in functions capable of interpreting the source information via C** statements.

Other improvements and extensions to this system will be defined herein.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

[NONE]

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

The present invention is built upon this and, in the preferred embodiment, uses a number of other key technologies and concepts. For example, these following patent applications (which are expressly incorporated herein) disclose all the components necessary to build up a system capable of auto-generating all user interface, storage tables, and querying behaviors required in order to create a system directly from the specifications given in an ontology description language (ODL). These various building-block technologies have been previously described in the following patent applications:

1) Appendix 1—Memory Patent (page 55)

2) Appendix 2—Lexical Patent (page 68)

3) Appendix 3—Parser Patent (page 89)

4) Appendix 4—Types Patent (page 112)

5) Appendix 5—Collections Patent (page 140)

6) Appendix 6—Ontology Patent (page 199)

In the Parser Patent, a system was described that permits execution of the statements in the embedded program in a sequence that is dictated wholly by the source content, in that the ‘reverse polish’ operators within that system are executed as the source parse reaches an appropriate state and, as further described in that patent, these operators are passed a plug-in hint string when invoked. In the preferred embodiment, the plug-in hint string will be the source for the interpreted ontology-based language and the plug-ins themselves will invoke an inner level parser in order to execute these statements. The Ontology Patent introduced an ontology based language that is an extension of the C language known as C*. This is the preferred ontology based language for the present invention. We will refer to the embedded form of this language as C**, the extra ‘*’ symbol being intended to imply the additional level of indirection created by embedding the language within a source format interpreter. The output of a mining process will be a set of ontology defined types (see Types Patent) within a flat data-model collection (see Memory Patent and Collection Patent) suitable for instantiation to persistent storage and subsequent query and access via the ontology (see patent reference 6).

In the preferred embodiment, a MitoMine parser is defined using three basic types of information:

1) A named source-specific lexical analyzer specification

2) A named BNF specification for parsing the source

3) A set of predefined plug-in functions capable of interpreting the source information via C** statements.

The BNF format may be based upon any number of different BNF specifications. MitoMine provides the following additional built-in parser plug-ins which greatly facilitate the process of extracting unstructured data into run-time type manager records: <@1:1> <@1:2>

These two plug-ins delimit the start and end of an arbitrary possibly multi-lined string to be assigned to the field designated by the following call to <@1:5:fieldPath=$>. This is the method used to extract large arbitrary text fields. The token sequence for these plug-ins is always of the form <@1:1><1:String><@1:2>, that is any text occurring after the appearance of the <@1:1> plug-in on the top of the parsing stack will be converted into a single string token (token # 1) which will be assigned on the next <@1:5> plug-in. The arbitrary text will be terminated by the occurrence of any terminal in the language (defined in the .LEX specification) whose value is above 128. Thus the following snippet of BNF will cause the field ‘pubName’ to be assigned whatever text occurs between the token <PUBLICATION> and <VOLUME/ISSUE> in the input file: <PUBLICATION> <@1:1> <1:String> <@1:2> <@1:5:pubName = $> <VOLUME/ISSUE> <3:DecInt> <@1:5:volume = $>

In the preferred embodiment, when extracting these arbitrary text fields, all trailing and leading white space is removed from the string before assignment, and all occurrences of LINE_FEED are removed to yield a valid text string. The fact that tokens below 128 will not terminate the arbitrary text sequence is important in certain situations where a particular string is a terminal in the language and yet might also occur within such a text sequence where it should not be considered to have any special significance. All such tokens can be assigned token numbers below 128 in the .LEX specification thus ensuring that no confusion arises. The occurrence of another <@1:1> or a <@1:4> plug-in causes any previous <1:String> text accumulated to be discarded. A <@1:5> causes execution of a C** statements that generally cause extracted information to be assigned to the specified field and then clears the record of the accumulation. If a plug-in hint consisting of a decimal number follows the <@1:1> as in <@1:1:4> that number specifies the maximum number of lines of input that will be consumed by the plug-in (four in this example). This is a useful means to handle input where the line number or count is significant.

-   -   <@1:3>

In the preferred embodiment, the occurrence of this plug-in indicates that the extraction of a particular record initiated by the <@1:4> plug-in is complete and should be added to the collection of records extracted.

-   -   <@1:4:typeName>

In the preferred embodiment, the occurrence of the plug-in above indicates that the extraction of a new record of the type specified by the ‘typeName’ string is to begin. The “typename” will preferably match a known type manager type either defined elsewhere or within the additionally type definitions supplied as part of the parser specification.

-   -   <@1:5:C** assignment(s)>

In the preferred embodiment, the plug-in above is used to assign values to either a field or a register. Within the assigned expression, the previously extracted field value may be referred to as ‘$’. Fields may be expressed as a path to sub-fields of the structure to any depth using normal type manager path notation (same as for C). As an example, the field specifier “description[$aa].u.equip.specifications” refers to a field within the parent structure that is within an array of unions. The symbol ‘$aa’ is a register designator. There are 26*26 registers ‘$aa’ to ‘$zz’ which may be used to hold the results of calculations necessary to compute field values. A single character register designator may also be used instead thus ‘$a’ is the same as ‘$aa’, ‘$b’ is the same as ‘$ba’ etc. Register names may optionally be followed by a text string (no spaces) in order to improve readability (as in $aa:myIndex) but this text string is ignored by the C** interpreter. The use of registers to store extracted information and context is key to handling the distributed nature of information in published sources. In the example above, ‘$a’ is being used as an index into the array of ‘description’ fields. To increment this index a “<@1:5:$a=$a+1>” plug-in call would be inserted in the appropriate part of the BNF (presumably after extraction of an entire ‘description’ element). All registers are initially set to zero (integer) when the parse begins, thereafter their value is entirely determined by the <@1:5> plug-ins that occur during the extraction process. If a register is assigned a real or string value, it adopts that type automatically until a value of another type is assigned to it. Expressions may include calls to functions (of the form $FuncName), which provide a convenient means of processing the inputs extracted into certain data types for assignment. These functions provide capabilities comparable to the string processing libraries commonly found with older generation data mining capabilities.

When assigning values to fields, the <@1:5> plug-in performs intelligent type conversions, for example:

1) If the token is a <1:String> and the field is a ‘charHdl’, a handle is created and assigned to the field. Similarly for a ‘charPtr’. If the field is a fixed length character array, the string is copied into it. If it won't fit, a bounds error is flagged. If the field is already non-empty (regardless of type) then the <@1:5> plugin appends any new text to the end of the field value (if possible). Note that registers do not append automatically unless you use the syntax $a=$a+“string”.

2) If the field is numeric, appropriate type conversions from the extracted value occur. Range checking could be automatic. Multiple assignments may be separated by semi-colons. The full syntax supported within the ‘assignment’ string is defined by the system BNF language “MitoMine” (described below).

Note that because the order of commutative operator (e.g., “+”) evaluation is guaranteed to be left-to-right, multiple non-parenthesized string concatenation operations can be safely expressed as a single statement as in:

fieldname=“Hello”+$FirstCapOnly($a)+“do you like”+$b+“\n”

The <@1:5> plug-in may also be used to support limited conditional statements which may be performed using the ‘if’ and ‘ifelse’ keywords. The effect of the ‘if’ is to conditionally skip the next element of the production that immediately follows the <@1:5> containing the ‘if’ (there can be only one statement within an ‘if’ or ‘ifelse’ block). For example: <@1:5:if(1 == 0)> <@1:4:typeName> would cause the <@1:4> plug-in to be discarded without interpretation. Similarly: <@1:5:ifelse(1 == 0)> <@1:4:typeName1> <@1:4:typeName2> causes execution of the second of the two <@1:4> plug-ins while: <@1:5:ifelse(0 == 0)> <@1:5:$a = $a + 1; $b = 1> <@1:5:$a = $a − 1; $b = 0> causes execution of the first block to increment $a and assign $b to 1.

More significantly, since it is possible to discard any element from the production in this manner, the prudent use of conditional <@1:5> evaluation can be used to modify the recognized syntax of the language. Consider the following production:

myProduction ::=<@1:5:ifelse ($a>=0)> positive_prod negative_prod

In this example, the contents of register ‘$a’ is determining which of two possible productions will get evaluated next. This can be a very powerful tool for solving non-context-free language ambiguities (normally intractable to this kind of parser) by remembering the context in one of the registers and then resolving the problem later when it occurs. The results of misusing this capability can be very confusing and the reader is referred to the incorporated materials of the Parser Patent for additional details. That having been said, the following simplified guidelines should help to ensure correctness: For any production of the form:   prod   ::= <@1:5:ifelse (expression)> theClause elseClause Ensure:  1) FIRST(thenClause) == FIRST(elseClause)  2) Either both thenClause and elseClause are NULLABLE, or neither is  3) If elseClause is not NULLABLE, and if necessary (depending on  other occurrences of thenClause),  include a production elsewhere {that may never be executed} to ensure  that FOLLOW(thenClause) includes FOLLOW(elseClause) For any production of the form:  prod   ::= prevElement <@1:5:if (expression)> thenClause nextElement Ensure that if thenClause is not NULLABLE, and if necessary (depending on other occurrences of nextElement), include a production elsewhere {that may never be executed} to ensure that FIRST(nextElement) is entirely contained within FOLLOW(prevElement).

Note that all plug-ins may contain multiple lines of text by use of the <cont> symbol (see Parser patent). This may be required in the case where a <@1:5> statement exceeds the space available on a single line (e.g., many parameters to a function). The maximum size of any given plug-in text in the preferred embodiment is 8 KB.

The present invention also permits the specification of the language specific parser to include any user dialogs and warnings that might be required for the parser concerned, any additional type definitions that might be required as part of parser operation, and any custom annotations and scripts (see Collections Patent) that might be necessary.

Within the <@1:5> plug-in, in addition to supporting conditionals, additive, multiplicative and assignment operators, this package preferably provides a number of built-in functions that may be useful in manipulating extracted values in order to convert them to a form suitable for assignment to typed fields. These functions are loosely equivalent to the string processing library of conventional mining languages. Function handlers may be registered (via a registry API—see Parser Patent for further details) to provide additional built in functions. In the built-in function descriptions below, for example, the type of a given parameter is indicated between square brackets. The meaning of these symbols in this example is as follows:

[I]—Integer value (64 bit)

[F]—Floating point value (double)

[S]—String value

The following is a partial list of predefined built-in functions that have been found to be useful in different data mining situations. New functions may be added to this list and it is expected that use of the system will often include the step of adding new functions. In such a case, if a feature is not provided, it can be implemented and registered as part of any particular parser definition. On the other hand, none of the features listed below are required meaning that a much smaller set of functions could also be used. In the preferred embodiment, however, the following functions (or ones having similar functionality) would be available.

1) [F] $Date( )

-   -   get current date/time into a date-double

2) [F] $StringToDate([S] dateString,[S] calendar)

-   -   convert “dateString” to date/time double, current date if date         string format invalid. The currently supported calendar values         are “G”—Gregorian, “J”—Julian etc. Note that in the Gregorian         calendar you may specify the date string in a wide variety of         formats, in any other calendar it must be in the following         format: “yyyy:mm:dd [hh:mm[:ss] [AM/PM]]”

3) [S] $TextAfter([S] srcStr,[S] delimStr)

-   -   Return the string portion after the specified delimiter         sequence. Returns “ ” if not found.

4) [S] $TextBefore([S] srcStr,[S] delimStr)

-   -   Return the string portion before the specified delimiter         sequence. Returns “ ” if not found.

5) [S] $TextBetween([S] srcStr,[S] startStr,[S] endStr)

-   -   Return the string portion between the specified delimiter         sequences. Returns “ ” if not found.

6) [I] $Integer([S] aString)

-   -   Convert the specified string to an integer (decimal or hex)

7) [F] $Real([S] aString)

-   -   Convert the specified string to a real number

8) [I] $IntegerWithin([S] aString[I] n)

-   -   Extract the n'th integer (decimal or hex, n=1 . . . ) within the         specified arbitrary string

9) [F] $RealWithin([S] aString[I] n)

-   -   Extract the n'th real (n=1 . . . ) within the specified         arbitrary string

10) [S] $StripMarkup([S] aString)

-   -   Strip any Markup language tags out of a string to yield plain         text.

11) [S] $SourceName( )

-   -   Inserts the current value of ‘languageName’

12) [S] $SetPersRefInfo([S] aString)

-   -   This function allows you to append to the contents of the         ‘stringH’ field of a persistent reference field rather than         assigning to the name. The function result is equal to ‘aString’         but the next assignment made by the parser will be to the         ‘stringH’ sub-field, not the ‘name’ sub-field.

13) [S] $FirstCapOnly([S] aString)

-   -   Converts a series of words in upper/lower case such that each         word starts with an upper case character and all subsequent         characters are lower case.

14) [S] $TextNotAfter([S] srcStr,[S] delimStr)

-   -   Similar in operation to $TextBefore( ) except if ‘delimStr’ is         not found, the original string is returned un-altered.

15) [S] $TextNotBefore([S] srcStr,[S] delimStr)

-   -   Similar in operation to $TextAfter( ) except if ‘delimStr’ is         not found, the original string is returned un-altered.

16) [S] $TextNotBetween([S] srcStr,[S] startStr,[S] endStr)

-   -   Returns what remains after removing the string portion between         the specified delimiter sequences (and the delimiter sequences         themselves). If the sequence is not found, the original string         is returned un-altered.

17) [S] $TruncateText([S] srcStr,[I] numChars)

-   -   Truncated the source string to the specified number of         characters.

18) [S] $TextBeforeNumber([S] srcStr)

-   -   This function is similar in operation to $TextBefore( ) but the         ‘delimStr’ is taken to be the first numeric digit encountered.

19) [S] $TextWithout([S] srcStr,[S] sequence)

-   -   This function removes all occurrences of the specified sequence         from the source string.

20) [S] $WordNumber([S] srcStr,[I] number)

-   -   This function gets the specified word (starting from 1) from the         source string. If ‘number’ is negative, the function counts         backward from the last word in the source string.

21) [S] $Ask([S] promptStr)

-   -   This function prompts the user using the specified string and         allows him to enter a textual response which is returned as the         function result.

22) [S] $TextWithoutBlock([S] srcStr,[S] startDelim,[S] endDelim)

-   -   This function removes all occurrences of the delimited text         block (including delimiters) from the source string.

23) [S] $ReplaceSequence([S] srcStr,[S] sequence,[S] nuSequence)

-   -   This function replaces all occurrences of the target sequence by         the sequence ‘nuSequence’ within the given string.

24) [S] $AppendIfNotPresent([S] srcStr,[S] endDelim)

-   -   This function determines if ‘srcStr’ ends in ‘endDelim’ and if         not appends ‘endDelim’ to ‘srcStr’ returning the result.

25) [S] $ProperNameFilter([S] srcStr,[I] wordMax,[S] delim)

-   -   This function performs the following processing (in order)         designed to facilitate the removal of extraneous strings of text         from ‘delim’ separated lists of proper names (i.e., capitalized         first letter words):     -   a) if the first non-white character in a ‘delim’ bounded block         is not upper case, remove the entire string up to and including         the trailing occurrence of ‘delim’ (or end of string).     -   b) for any ‘delim’ bounded block, strip off all trailing words         that start with lower case letters.     -   c) if more than ‘wordMax’ words beginning with a lower case         letter occur consecutively between two occurrences of ‘delim’,         terminate the block at the point where the consecutive words         occur.

26) [S] $Sprintf([S] formatStr, . . . )

-   -   This function performs a C language sprintf( ) function,         returning the generated string as its result.

27) [S] $ShiftChars([S] srcStr,[I] delta)

-   -   This function shifts the character encoding of all elements of         ‘srcStr’ by the amount designated in ‘delta’ returning the         shifted string as a result. This functionality can be useful for         example when converting between upper and lower case.

28) [S] $FlipChars([S] srcStr)

-   -   This function reverses the order of all characters in ‘srcStr’.

29) [S] $ReplaceBlockDelims([S] srcStr,[S] startDelim,[S] endDelim,[S] nuStartDelim, [S] nuEndDelim,[I] occurrence, [I] reverse)

-   -   This function replaces the start and end delimiters of one or         more delimited blocks of text by the new delimiters specified.         If ‘occurrence’ is zero, all blocks found are processed,         otherwise just the block specified (starting from 1). If         ‘reverse’ is non-zero (i.e., 1), this function first locates the         ending delimiter and then works backwards looking for the start         delimiter. Often if the start delimiter is something common like         a space character (e.g., looking for the last word of a         sentence), the results of this may be quite different from those         obtained using ‘reverse’=0.

30) [S] $RemoveIfFollows([S] srcStr,[S] endDelim)

-   -   This function determines if ‘srcStr’ ends in ‘endDelim’ and if         so removes ‘endDelim’ from ‘srcStr’ returning the result.

31) [S] $RemoveIfStarts([S] srcStr,[S] startDelim)

-   -   This function determines if ‘srcStr’ starts with ‘startDelim’         and if so removes ‘startDelim’ from ‘srcStr’ returning the         result.

32) [S] $PrependIfNotPresent([S] srcStr,[S] startDelim)

This function determines if ‘srcStr’ starts with ‘startDelim’ and if not prepends ‘startDelim’ to ‘srcStr’ returning the result.

33) [S] $NoLowerCaseWords([S] srcStr)

-   -   This function eliminates all words beginning with lower case         letters from ‘srcStr’ returning the result.

34) [S] $ReplaceBlocks([S] srcStr,[S] startDelim,[S] endDelim,[I] occurrence,[S] nuSequence)

-   -   This function replaces one or all blocks delimited by the         specified delimiter sequences with the replacement sequence         specified. If ‘occurrence’ is zero, all blocks are replaced,         otherwise the occurrence is a one-based index to the block to         replace.

35) [S] $AppendIfNotFollows([S] srcStr,[S] endDelim)

-   -   This function determines if ‘srcStr’ ends in ‘endDelim’ and if         not appends ‘endDelim’ to ‘srcStr’ returning the result.

36) [I] $WordCount([S] srcStr)

-   -   This function counts the number of words in the source string,         returning the numeric result.

37) [S] $PreserveParagraphs([S] srcStr)

-   -   This function eliminates all line termination characters         (replacing them by spaces) in the source string other than those         that represent paragraph breaks. Source text has often been         formatted to fit into a fixed page width (e.g., 80 characters)         and since we wish the captured text to re-size to fit whatever         display area is used, it is often necessary to eliminate the         explicit line formatting from large chunks of text using this         function. A paragraph is identified by a line termination         immediately followed by a tab or space character (also works         with spaces for right justified scripts), all other explicit         line formatting is eliminated. The resulting string is returned.

38) [I] $StringSetIndex([S] srcStr,[I] ignoreCase,[S] setStrl . . . [S] setStrN)

-   -   This function compares ‘srcStr’ to each of the elements in the         set of possible match strings supplied, returning the index         (starting from 1) of the match string found, or zero if no match         is found. If ‘ignoreCase’ is non-zero, the comparisons are case         insensitive, otherwise they are exact.

39) [S] $IndexStringSet([I] index,[S] setStrl . . . [S] setStrN)

-   -   This function selects a specific string from a given set of         strings by index (1-based), returning as a result the selected         string. If the index specified is out of range, an empty string         is returned.

40) [S] $ReplaceChars([S] srcStr,[S] char,[S] nuChar)

-   -   This function replaces all occurrences of ‘char’ in the string         by ‘nuChar’ returning the modified string as a result.

41) [S] $Sentence([S] srcStr,[I] index)

-   -   This function extracts the designated sentence (indexing starts         from 0) from the string, returning as a result the sentence. If         the index specified is negative, the index counts backwards from         the end (i.e., −1 is the last sentence etc.). A sentence is         identified by any sequence of text terminated by a period.

42) [S] $FindHyperlink([S] srcStr,[S] domain, [I] index)

-   -   This function will extract the index'th hyperlink in the         hyperlink domain specified by ‘domain’ that exists in ‘srcStr’         (if any) and return as a result the extracted hyperlink name.         This technique can be used to recognize known things (e.g., city         or people names) in an arbitrary block of text. If no matching         hyperlink is found, the function result will be an empty string.

43) [S] $AssignRefType([S] aString)

This function allows you to assign directly to the typeID sub-field of a persistent reference field rather than assigning to the name. The function result is equal to ‘aString’ but the next assignment made by the parser will be to the typeID sub-field ‘aString’ is assumed to be a valid type name), not the ‘name’ sub-field.

44) [I] $RecordCount( )

-   -   This function returns the number of records created so far         during the current mining process.

45) [S] $Exit([S] aReason)

-   -   Calling this function causes the current parsing run to exit         cleanly, possibly displaying a reason for the exit (to the         console) as specified in the ‘aReason’ string (NULL if no reason         given).

46) [I] $MaxRecords( )

-   -   This function returns the maximum number of records to be         extracted for this run. This value can either be set by calling         $SetMaxRecords( ) or it may be set by external code calling         MN_SetMaxRecords( ).

47) [I] $SetMaxRecords([I] max)

-   -   This function sets the maximum number of records to be extracted         for this run. See $MaxRecords( ) for details.

48) [I] $FieldSize([S] fieldName)

-   -   This function returns the size in bytes of the field specified         in the currently active type record as set by the preceding         <@1:4:typeName> operator. Remember that variable sized string         fields (i.e., char @fieldName) and similar will return a size of         size of (Ptr), not the size of the string within it.

49) [I] $TextContains([S] srcText,[S] subString)

-   -   This function returns 0 if the ‘srcText’ does not contain         ‘subString’, otherwise it returns the character index within         ‘srcText’ where ‘subString’ starts+1.

50) [I] $ZapRegisters([S] minReg,[S] maxReg)

-   -   This function empties the contents of all registers starting         from ‘minReg’ and ending on ‘maxReg’. The parameters are simply         the string equivalent of the register name (e.g., “$aa”). When         processing multiple records, the use of $ZapRegisters( ) is         often more convenient than explicit register assignments to         ensure that all the desired registers start out empty as record         processing begins. The result is the count of the number of         non-empty registers that were zapped.

51) [I] $CRCString([S] srcText)

This function performs a 32-bit CRC similar to ANSI X3.66 on the text string supplied, returning the integer CRC result. This is can be useful when you want to turn an arbitrary (i.e., non-alphanumeric) string into a form that is (probably!) unique for name generating or discriminating purposes.

Note that parameters to routines may be either constants (of integer, real or string type), field specifiers referring to fields within the current record being extracted, registers, $ (the currently extracted field value), or evaluated expressions which may include embedded calls to other functions (built-in or otherwise). This essentially creates a complete programming language for the extraction of data into typed structures and collections. The C** programming language provided by the <@1:5> plug-ins differs from a conventional programming language in that the order of execution of the statements is determined by the BNF for the language and the contents of the data file being parsed. In the preferred embodiment, the MitoMine parser is capable of recognizing and evaluating the following token types:

-   -   3—DecInt—syntax as for a C strtoul( ) call but ignores embedded         commas.     -   4—Real—real—as for C strtod( )     -   5—Real—real scientific format—as for C strtod( )

The plug-in 5 MitoMine parser, in addition to recognizing registers, $, $function names, and type field specifications, can also preferably recognize and assign the following token types:

-   -   2—character constant (as for C)     -   7—Hex integer (C format)     -   3—decimal integer (as for C strtoul)     -   10—octal integer (as for strtoul)     -   4—real (as for strtod)     -   5—real with exponent (as for strtod)     -   12—string constant (as for C)

Character constants can be a maximum of 8 characters long, during input, they are not sign extended. The following custom parser options would preferably be supported:

-   -   kTraceAssignments (0x00010000)—Produces a trace of all <@1:5>         assignments on the console     -   kpLineTrace (0x00020000)—Produces a line trace on the console     -   kTraceTokens (0x00040000)—Produces a trace of each token         recognized

These options may be specified for a given parser language by adding the corresponding hex value to the parser options line. For example, the specification below would set kTraceAssignments+kpLineTrace options in addition to those supported by the basic parse package:

-   -   0x30000+kPreserveBNFsymbols+kBeGreedyParser

The lexical analyzer options line can also be used to specify additional white-space and delimiter characters to the lexical analyzer as a comma separated list. For example the specification below would cause the characters ‘a’ and ‘b’ to be treated as whitespace (see LX_AddWhiteSpace) and the characters ‘Y’ and ‘Z’ to be treated as delimiters (see LX_AddDelimiter).

-   -   =kNoCaseStates+whitespace(a,b)+delimiter(Y,Z)

Appendix A (page 28) provides a sample of the BNF and LEX specifications that define the syntax of the <@1:5> plug-in (i.e., C**) within MitoMine (see Parser Patent for further details). Note that most of the functionality of C** is already provided by the predefined plug-in functions (plug-in 0) supplied by the basic parser package. A sample implementation of the <@1:5> plug-in one and a sample implementation of a corresponding resolver function are also provided.

As described previously, the lexical and BNF specifications for the outermost parser vary depending on the source being processed (example given below), however the outer parser also has a single standard plug-in and resolver. A sample implementation of the standard plug-in one and a sample implementation of a corresponding resolver function are also provided in Appendix A.

The listing below gives the API interface to the MitoMine capability for the preferred embodiment although other forms are obviously possible. Appendix A provides the sample pseudo code for the API interface.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_MakeParser( ), initializes an instance of the MitoMine and returns a handle to the parser database which is required by all subsequent calls. A ‘parserType’ parameter could be provided to select a particular parsing language to be loaded (see PS_LoadBNF) and used.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_SetRecordAdder( ) determines how (or if) records once parsed are added to the collection. The default record adder creates a set of named lists where each list is named after the record type it contains.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_SetMineFunc( ), sets the custom mine function handler for a MitoMine parser. Additional functions could also be defined over and above those provided by MitoMine within the <@1:5: . . . > plugin context. A sample mine function handler follows: static Boolean myFunc ( // custom function handler    ET_ParseHdl  aParseDB, //IO:handle to parser DB    int32  aContextID //I:context ) // R:TRUE for success {  p = (myContextPtr)aContextID; // get our context pointer  opCount = PS_GetOpCount(aParseDB,TOP); // get # of operands  tokp = PS_GetToken(aParseDB,opCount); // get fn name  for ( i = 0 ; i < opCount ; i++ )   if ( !PS_EvalIdent(aParseDB,i) ) // eval all elements on stack   {    res = NO;    goto BadExit;   }  if ( !US_strcmp(tokp,“$myFuncName”) ) // function name  {   -- check operand count and type   -- implement function   -- set resulting value into stack ‘opCount’ e.g.:     PS_SetiValue(aParseDB,opCount,result);  } else if ( !US_strcmp(tokp,“$another function”) )

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_SetMaxRecords( ), sets the maximum number of records to be mined for a MitoMine parser. This is the number returned by the built-in function $GetMaxRecords( ). If the maximum number of records is not set (i.e., is zero), all records are mined until the input file(s) is exhausted.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_SetMineLineFn( ), sets the MitoMine line processing function for a given MitoMine parser. A typical line processing function might appear as follows: static void myLineFn ( // Built-in debugging mine-line fn     ET_ParseHdl   aParseDB, // I:Parser DB     int32   aContextID, // I:Context     int32   lineNum, // I:Current line number     charPtr   lineBuff, // IO:Current line buffer     charPtr   aMineLineParam // I:String parameter to function  ) // R:void

These functions can be used to perform all kinds of different useful functions such as altering the input stream before the parse sees it, adjusting parser debugging settings, etc. The ‘aMineLineParam’ parameter above is an arbitrary string and can be formatted any way you wish in order to transfer the necessary information to the line processing function. The current value of this parameter is set using MN_SetMineLineParam( ).

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_SetMineLineParam( ), sets the string parameter to a MitoMine line processing function.

In the preferred embodiment, two functions, hereinafter called MN_SetParseTypeDB( ) and MN_GetParseTypeDB( ), can be used to associate a type DB (probably obtained using MN_GetMineLanguageTypeDB) with a MitoMine parser. This is preferable so that the plug-ins associated with the extraction process can determine type information for the structures unique to the language. In the preferred embodiment, the function MN_GetParseTypeDB( ) would return the current setting of the parser type DB.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_SetFilePath( ), sets the current file path associated with a MitoMine parser.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_GetFilePath( ), gets the current file path associated with a MitoMine parser.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_SetCustomContext( ), may be used to get the custom context value associated with a given MitoMine parser. Because MitoMine itself uses the parser context (see PS_SetContextID), it provides this alternative API to allow custom context to be associated with a parser.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_GetCustomContext( ), may be used to get the custom context value associated with a given MitoMine parser. Because MitoMine itself uses the parser context (see PS_SetContextID), it provides this alternative API to allow custom context to be associated with a parser.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN GetParseCollection( ), returns the collection object associated with a parser. MN_SetParseCollection( ) allows this value to be altered. By calling MN_SetParseCollection( . . . ,NULL) it is possible to detach a collection from the parser in cases where you wish the collection to survive the parser teardown process.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_SetParseCollection( ), returns the collection object associated with a parser. MN_SetParseCollection( ) allows this value to be altered. By calling MN_SetParseCollection( . . . ,NULL) it is possible to detach a collection from the parser. This would be useful in cases where it is preferable to permit the collection to survive the parser teardown process.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_GetMineLanguageTypeDB( ), returns a typeDB handle to the type DB describing the structures utilized by the specified mine language. If the specified typeDB already exists, it is simply returned, otherwise a new type DB is created by loading the type definitions from the designated MitoMine type specification file.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_KillParser( ), disposes of the Parser database created by MN_MakeParser( ). A matching call to MN_KillParser( ) must exist for every call to MN_MakeParser( ). This call would also invoke MN_CleanupRecords( ) for the associated collection.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_Parser( ), invokes the MitoMine parser to process the designated file. The function is passed a parser database created by a call to MN_MakeParser( ). When all calls to MN_Parse( ) are complete, the parser database must be disposed using MN_KillParser( ).

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_RunMitoMine( ), creates the selected MitoMine parser on the contents of a string handle. An parameter could also be passed to the MN_MakeParser( ) call and can thus be used to specify various debugging options.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_CleanupRecords( ), cleans up all memory associated with the set of data records created by a call to MN_RunMitoMine( ).

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_RegisterMineMuncher( ), can be used to register by name a function to be invoked to post process the set of records created after a successful MitoMine run. The name of the registered Muncher function would preferably match that of the mining language (see MN_Parse for details). A typical mine-muncher function might appear as follows: static ET_CollectionHdl myMuncher( // My Mine Muncher function     ET_MineScanRecPtr scanP, // IO:Scanning context record     ET_CollectionHdl theRecords, // I:Collection of parsed records     char typeDBcode, // I:The typeDB code     charPtr parserType, // I:The parser type/language name     ET_Offset root, // I:Root element designator     charPtr customString // I:Avail pass cstm strig to muncher ) // R:The final collection

The ‘scanP’ parameter is the same ‘scanP’ passed to the file filter function and can thus be used to communicate between file filters and the muncher or alternatively to clean up any leftovers from the file filters within the ‘muncher’. Custom ‘muncher’ functions can be used to perform a wide variety of complex tasks, indeed the MitoMine approach has been used successfully to extract binary (non-textual) information from very complex sources, such as encoded database files, by using this technique.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_DeRegisterMineMuncher( ), de-registers a previously registered mine muncher function.

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_InvokeMineMuncher( ), invokes the registered ‘muncher’ function for the records output by a run of MitoMine (see MN_RunMitoMine). If no function is registered, the records and all associated memory are simply disposed using MN_CleanupRecords( ).

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_RegisterFileFilter( ), can be used to register by name a file filter function to be invoked to process files during a MitoMine run. If no file filter is registered, files are treated as straight text files, otherwise the file must be loaded and pre/post processed by the file filter. A typical file filter function might appear as follows: static EngErr myFileFilter ( // Scan files and mine if appropr     HFileInfo *aCatalogRec, // IO:The catalog search record     int32Ptr flags, // IO:available for flag use     ET_MineScanRecPtr scanP // IO:Scanning context record ) // R:zero for success, else error #

In the preferred embodiment, a function, hereinafter called MN_ListFileFilters( ), obtains a string list of all know MitoMine file filter functions.

In order to illustrate how MitoMine is used to extract information from a given source and map it into its ontological equivalent, we will use the example of the ontological definition of the Country record pulled from the CIA World Fact book. The extract provided in Appendix B (page 45) is a portion of the first record of data for the country Afghanistan taken from the 1998 edition of this CD-ROM. The format of the information in this case appears to be a variant of SGML, but it is clear that this approach applies equally to almost any input format. The lexical analyzer and BNF specification for the parser to extract this source into a sample ontology are also provided in Appendix B. The BNF necessary to extract country information into a sample ontology is one of the most complex scripts thus far encountered in MitoMine applications due to the large amount of information that is being extracted from this source and preserved in the ontology. Because this script is so complex, it probably best illustrates a less than ideal data-mining scenario but also demonstrates use of a large number of different built-in mining functions. Some of the results of running the extraction script below can be seen in the Ontology patent relating to auto-generated UI.

Note that in the BNF provided in Appendix B, a number of distinct ontological items are created, not just a country. The BNF starts out by creating a “Publication” record that identifies the source of the data ingested; it also creates a “Government” record, which is descended from Organization. The Government record is associated with the country and forms the top level of the description of the government/organization of that country (of which the military branches created later are a part). In addition, other records could be created and associated with the country, for example the “opt_figure” production is assigning a variety of information to the ‘stringH’ field of the “mapImage” field that describes a persistent reference to the file that contains the map image. When the data produced by this parse is written to persistent storage, this image file is also copied to the image server and through the link created, can be recalled and displayed whenever the country is displayed (as is further demonstrated in the UI examples of the Ontology Patent). In fact, as a result of extracting a single country record, perhaps 50-100 records of different types are created by this script and associated in some way with the country including government personnel, international organizations, resources, population records, images, cities and ports, neighboring countries, treaties, notes, etc. Thus it is clear that what was flat, un-related information in the source has been converted to richly interconnected, highly computable and usable ontological information after the extraction completes. This same behavior is repeated for all the diverse sources that are mined into any given system the information from all such sources becomes cross-correlated and therefore infinitely more useful that it was in its separate, isolated form. The power of this approach over conventional data mining technologies is clear.

The foregoing description of the preferred embodiments of the invention has been presented for the purposes of illustration and description. For example, although described with respect to the C* programming language, any programming language that includes the appropriate extensions could be used to implement this invention. Additionally, the claimed system and method should not be limited to the particular API disclosed. The descriptions of the header structures should also not be limited to the embodiments described. While the sample pseudo code provides examples of the code that may be used, the plurality of implementations that could in fact be developed is nearly limitless. For these reasons, this description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teaching. It is intended that the scope of the invention be limited not by this detailed description, but rather by the claims appended hereto.

APPENDIX 1 SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING MEMORY Inventor: John Fairweather BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The Macintosh Operating system (“OS”), like all OS layers, provides an API where applications can allocate and de-allocate arbitrary sized blocks of memory from a heap. There are two basic types of allocation, viz: handles and pointers. A pointer is a non-relocatable block of memory in heap (referred to as *p in the C programming language, hereinafter “C”), while a handle is a non-relocatable reference to a relocatable block of memory in heap (referred to as **h in C). In general, handles are used in situations where the size of an allocation may grow, as it is possible that an attempt to grow a pointer allocation may fail due to the presence of other pointers above it. In many operating systems (including OS X on the Macintosh) the need for a handle is removed entirely as a programmer may use the memory management hardware to convert all logical addresses to and from physical addresses.

The most difficult aspect of using handle based memory, however, is that unless the handle is ‘locked’, the physical memory allocation for the handle can move around in memory by the memory manager at any time. Movement of the physical memory allocation is often necessary in order to create a large enough contiguous chunk for the new block size. The change in the physical memory location, however, means that one cannot ‘de-reference’ a handle to obtain a pointer to some structure within the handle and pass the pointer to other systems as the physical address will inevitably become invalid. Even if the handle is locked, any pointer value(s) are only valid in the current machine's memory. If the structure is passed to another machine, it will be instantiated at a different logical address in memory and all pointer references from elsewhere will be invalid. This makes it very difficult to efficiently pass references to data. What is needed, then, is a method for managing memory references such that a reference can be passed to another machine and the machine would be able to retrieve or store the necessary data even if the physical address of the data has been changed when transferred to the new machine or otherwise altered as a result of changes to the data.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The following invention provides a method for generating a memory reference that is capable of being transferred to different machine or memory location without jeopardizing access to relevant data. Specifically, the memory management system and method of the present invention creates a new memory tuple that creates both a handle as well as a reference to an item within the handle. In the latter case, the reference is created using an offset value that defines the physical offset of the data within the memory block. If references are passed in terms of their offset value, this value will be the same in any copy of the handle regardless of the machine. In the context of a distributed computing environment, all that then remains is to establish the equivalence between handles, which can accomplished in a single transaction between two communicating machines. Thereafter, the two machines can communicate about specific handle contents simply by using offsets.

The minimum reference is therefore a tuple comprised of the handle together with the offset into the memory block, we shall call such a tuple an ‘ET_ViewRef’ and sample code used to create such a tuple 100 in C is provided in FIG. 1. Once this tuple has been created, it becomes possible to use the ET_ViewRef structure as the basic relocatable handle reference in order to reference structures internal to the handle even when the handle may move. The price for this flat memory model is the need for a wrapper layer that transparently handles the kinds of manipulations described above during all de-referencing operations, however, even with such a wrapper, operations in this flat memory model are considerably faster that corresponding OS supplied operations on the application heap.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 illustrates sample code used to create the minimum reference ‘tuple’ of the present invention;

FIG. 2 illustrates a drawing convention that is used to describe the interrelationship between sub-layers in one embodiment of the present invention;

FIG. 3 illustrates a sample header block that may be used to practice the present invention;

FIG. 4 illustrates a simple initial state for a handle containing multiple structures;

FIG. 5 illustrates the type of logical relationships that may be created between structures in a handle following the addition of a new structure;

FIG. 6 illustrates a sample of a handle after increasing the size of a given structure within the handle beyond its initial physical memory allocation;

FIG. 7 illustrates the manner in which a handle could be adapted to enable unlimited growth to a given structure within the handle;

FIG. 8 illustrates the handle after performing an undo operation;

FIG. 9 illustrates a handle that has been adapted to include a time axis in the header field of the structures within the handle;

FIG. 10 illustrates the manner in which the present invention can be used to store data as a hierarchical tree; and

FIG. 11 illustrates the process for using the memory model to sort structures within a handle.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Descriptive Conventions

In order to graphically describe the architectural components and interrelations that comprise the software, this document adopts a number of formalized drawing conventions. In general, any given software aspect is built upon a number of sub-layers. Referring now to FIG. 2, a block diagram is provided that depicts these sub-layers as a ‘stack’ of blocks. The lowest block is the most fundamental (generally the underlying OS) and the higher block(s) are successive layers of abstraction built upon lower blocks. Each such block is referred to interchangeably as either a module or a package.

The first, an opaque module 200, is illustrated as a rectangular in FIG. 2A. An opaque module 200 is one that cannot be customized or altered via registered plug-ins. Such a form generally provides a complete encapsulation of a given area of functionality for which customization is either inappropriate or undesirable.

The second module, illustrated as T-shaped form 210 in FIG. 2B, represents a module that provides the ability to register plug-in functions that modify its behavior for particular purposes. In FIG. 2A, these plug-ins 220 are shown as ‘hanging’ below the horizontal bar of the module 210. In such cases, the module 210 provides a complete ‘logical’ interface to a certain functional capability while the plug-ins 220 customize that functionality as desired. In general, the plug-ins 220 do not provide a callable API of their own. This methodology provides the benefits of customization and flexibility without the negative effects of allowing application specific knowledge to percolate any higher up the stack than necessary. Generally, most modules provide a predefined set of plug-in behaviors so that for normal operation they can be used directly without the need for plug-in registration.

In any given diagram, the visibility of lower layers as viewed from above, implies that direct calls to that layer from higher-level layers above is supported or required as part of normal operation. Modules that are hidden vertically by higher-level modules, are not intended to be called directly in the context depicted.

FIG. 2C illustrates this descriptive convention. Module 230 is built upon and makes use of modules 235, 240, and 245 (as well as what may be below module 245). Module 230, 235 and 240 make use of module 245 exclusively. The functionality within module 240 is completely hidden from higher level modules via module 230, however direct access to modules 250 and 235 (but not 245) is still possible.

In FIG. 2D, the Viewstructs memory system and method 250 is illustrated. The ViewStructs 250 package (which implements the memory model described herein) is layered directly upon the heap memory encapsulation 280 provided by the TBFilters 260, TrapPatches 265, and WidgetQC 270 packages. These three packages 260, 265, 270 form the heap memory abstraction, and provide sophisticated debugging and memory tracking capabilities that are discussed elsewhere. When used elsewhere, the terms ViewStructs or memory model apply only to the contents of a single handle within the heap.

To reference and manipulate variable sized structures within a single memory allocation, we require that all structures start with a standard header block. A sample header block (called an ET_Hdr) may be defined in C programming language as illustrated in FIG. 3. For the purpose of discussing the memory model, we shall only consider the use of ET_Offset fields 310, 320, 330, 340. The word ‘flags’ 305, among other things, indicates the type of record follows the ET_Hdr. The ‘version’ 350 and ‘date’ fields 360 are associated with the ability to map old or changed structures into the latest structure definition, but these fields 350, 360 are not necessary to practice the invention and are not discussed herein.

Referring now to FIG. 4, FIG. 4 illustrates a simple initial state for a handle containing multiple structures. The handle contains two distinct memory structures, structure 410 and structure 420. Each structure is preceded by a header record, as previously illustrated in FIG. 3, which defines its type (not shown) and its relationship to other structures in the handle. As can be seen from the diagram, the ‘NextItem’ field 310 is simply a daisy chain where each link simply gives the relative offset from the start of the referencing structure to the start of the next structure in the handle. Note that all references in this model are relative to the start of the referencing structure header and indicate the (possibly scaled) offset to the start of the referenced structure header. The final structure in the handle is indicated by a header record 430 with no associated additional data where ‘NextItem=0′. By following the ‘NextItem’ daisy chain it is possible to examine and locate every structure within the handle.

As the figure illustrates, the ‘parent’ field 340 is used to indicate parental relationships between different structures in the handle. Thus we can see that structure B 420 is a child of structure A 410. The terminating header record 430 (also referred to as an ET_Null record) always has a parent field that references the immediately preceding structure in the handle. Use of the parent field in the terminating header record 430 does not represent a “parent” relationship, it is simply a convenience to allow easy addition of new records to the handle. Similarly, the otherwise meaningless moveFrom’ field 330 for the first record in the handle contains a relative reference to the final ET_Null. This provides an expedient way to locate the logical end of the handle without the need to daisy chain through the ‘nextItem’ fields for each structure.

Referring now to FIG. 5, FIG. 5 illustrates the logical relationship between the structures after adding a third structure C 510 to the handle. As shown in FIG. 5, structure C 510 is a child of B 420 (grandchild of A 410). The insertion of the new structure involves the following steps:

-   -   1) If necessary, grow the handle to make room for C 510, C's         header 520, and the trailing ET_Null record 430;     -   2) Overwrite the previous ET_Null 430 with the header and body         of structure C 510.     -   3) Set up C's parent relationship. In the illustrated example,         structure C 510 is a child of B 420, which is established by         pointing the ‘parent’ field of C's header file 520 to the start         of structure B 420.     -   4) Append a final ET_Null 530, with parent referenced to C's         header 520.     -   5) Adjust the ‘moveFrom’ field 330 to reflect the offset of the         new terminating ET_Null 530.

In addition to adding structures, the present invention must handle growth within existing structures. If a structure, such as structure B 420, needs to grow, it is often problematic since there may be another structure immediately following the one being grown (structure C 510 in the present illustration). Moving all trailing structures down to make enough room for the larger B 420 is one way to resolve this issue but this solution, in addition to being extremely inefficient for large handles, destroy the integrity of the handle contents, as the relative references within the original B structure 420 would be rendered invalid once such a shift had occurred. The handle would then have to be scanned looking for such references and altering them. The fact that structures A 410, B 420, and C 510 will generally contain relative references over and above those in the header portion make this impractical without knowledge of all structures that might be part of the handle. In a dynamic computing environment such knowledge would rarely, if ever, be available, making such a solution impractical and in many cases impossible.

For these reasons, the header for each structure further includes a moveFrom and moveTo fields. FIG. 6 illustrates the handle after growing B 420 by adding the enlarged B′ structure 610 to the end of the handle. As shown, the original B structure 420 remains where it is and all references to it (such as the parent reference from C 510) are unchanged. B 420 is now referred to as the “base record” whereas B′ 610 is the “moved record”. Whenever any reference is resolved now, the process of finding the referenced pointer address using C code is: src = address of referencing structure header dst = src + ET_Offset value for the reference if ( dst->moveTo )  dst = dst + dst->moveTo  -- follow the move

Further whenever a new reference is created, the process of finding the referenced pointer using C code is: src = address of referencing structure header dst = address of referenced structure header if ( dst->moveFrom )  dst = dst + dst->moveFrom; ref value = dst − src

Thus, the use of the moveto and movefrom fields ensures that no references become invalid, even when structures must be moved as they grow.

FIG. 7 illustrates the handle when B 420 must be further expanded into B″ 710. In this case the ‘moveTo’ of the base record 420 directly references the most recent version of the structure, in this example B″ 710. Correspondingly, the record B″ 710 now has a ‘moveFrom’ 720 field that references the base record 420. B's moveFrom 720 still refers back to B 420 and indeed if there were more intermediate records between B 420 and B″ (such as B′ 610 in this example) the ‘moveTo’ and ‘moveFrom’ fields for all of the records 420, 610, 710 would form a doubly linked list. Once each of these records 420, 610, 710 have been linked, it is possible to re-trace through all previous versions of a structure using these links. For example, one could find all previous versions of the record starting with B″ 710 by following the ‘movefrom’ field 720 to the base record 420 and then following the ‘nextItem’ link of each record until a record with a ‘moveFrom’ referencing the base record 420 is found. Alternatively, and perhaps more reliably, one could look for structures whose ‘moveTo’ field references record 420 and then work backward through the chain to find earlier versions.

This method, in which the last ‘grown’ structure moves to the end of the handle, has the beneficial effect that the same structure is often grown many times in sequence and in these cases we can optionally avoid creating a series of intermediate ‘orphan’ records. References occurring from within the bodies of structures may be treated in a similar manner to those described above and thus by extrapolation one can see that arbitrarily complex collections of cross-referencing structures can be created and maintained in this manner all within a single ‘flat’ memory allocation.

The price for this flat memory model is the need for a wrapper layer that transparently handles the kinds of manipulations described above during all de-referencing operations, however, even with such a wrapper, operations in this flat memory model are considerably faster that corresponding OS supplied operations on the application heap. Regardless of complexity, a collection of cross-referencing structures created using this approach is completely ‘flat’ and the entire ‘serialization’ issue is avoided when passing such collections between processors. This is a key requirement in a distributed data-flow based environment.

In addition to providing the ability to grow and move structures without impacting the references in other structures, another advantage of the ‘moveTo’/‘moveFrom’ approach is inherent support for ‘undo’. FIG. 8 illustrates the handle after performing an ‘undo’ on the change from B′ to B″. The steps involved for ‘undo’ are provided below: src = base record (i.e., B) dst = locate ‘moved’ record (i.e. B’’) by following ‘moveTo’ of base record prev = locate last record in handle whose ‘moveTo’ references dst src->moveTo = prev − src;

The corresponding process for ‘redo’ (which restores the state to that depicted after B″ was first added) is depicted below: src = base record (i.e., B) dst = locate ‘moved’ record (i.e. B’) by following ‘moveTo’ of base record if ( dst->moveTo )  nxt = dst + dst->moveTo src->moveTo = nxt − src;

This process works because of the fact that ‘moveTo’ fields are only followed once when referencing via the base record. The ability to trivially perform undo/redo operations is very useful in situations where the structures involved represent information being edited by the user, it is also an invaluable technique for handling the effects of a time axis in the data.

One method for maintaining a time axis is by using a date field in the header of each structure. In this situation, the undo/redo mechanism can be combined with a ‘date’ field 910 in the header that holds the date when the item was actually changed. This process is illustrated in FIG. 9 (some fields have been omitted for clarity).

This time axis can also be used to track the evolution of data over time. Rather than using the ‘moveTo’ fields to handle growing structures, the ‘moveTo’ fields could be used to reference future iterations of the data. For example, the base record could specify that it stores the high and low temperatures for a given day in Cairo. Each successive record within that chain of structures could then represent the high and low temperatures for a given date 910, 920, 930, 940. By using the “date” fields 910, 920, 930, 940 in this fashion, the memory system and method can be used to represent and reference time-variant data, a critical requirement of any system designed to monitor, query, and visualize information over time. Moreover, this ability to handle time variance exists within the ‘flat’ model and thus data can be distributed throughout a system while still retaining variance information. This ability lends itself well to such things as evolving simulations, database record storage and transaction rollback, and animations.

Additionally, if each instance of a given data record represents a distinct version of the data designed for a different ‘user’ or process, this model can be used to represent data having multiple values depending on context. To achieve this, whatever variable is driving the context is simply used to set the ‘moveTo’ field of the base record, much like time was used in the example above. This allows the model to handle differing security privileges, data whose value is a function of external variables or state, multiple distinct sources for the same datum, configuration choices, user interface display options, and other multi-value situations.

A ‘flags’ field could also be used in the header record and can be used to provide additional flexibility and functionality within the memory model. For example, the header could include a ‘flag’ field that is split into two parts. The first portion could contain arbitrary logical flags that are defined on a per-record type basis. The second portion could be used to define the structure type for the data that follows the header. While the full list of all possible structure types is a matter of implementation, the following basic types are examples of types that may be used and will be discussed herein:

kNullRecord—a terminating NULL record, described above.

kStringRecord—a ‘C’ format variable length string record.

kSimplexRecord—a variable format/size record whose contents is described by a type-id.

kComplexRecord—a ‘collection’ element description record (discussed below)

kOrphanRecord—a record that has been logically deleted/orphaned and no longer has any meaning.

By examining the structure type field of a given record, the memory wrapper layer is able to determine ‘what’ that record is and more importantly, what other fields exist within the record itself that also participate in the memory model, and must be handled by the wrapper layer. The following definition describes a structure named ‘kComplexRecord’ and will be used to illustrate this method: typedef struct ET_Complex // Collection element record {  ET_Hdr hdr; // Standard header  ...  ET_Offset /* ET_SimplexPtr */ valueR; // value reference  ET_TypeID typeID; // ID of this type  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ nextElem; // next elem. link  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ prevElem; // prev. elem. link  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ childHdr; // First child link  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ childTail; // Last child link  ... } ET_Complex;

The structure defined above may be used to create arbitrary collections of typed data and to navigate around these collections. It does so by utilizing the additional ET_Offset fields listed above to create logical relationships between the various elements within the handle.

FIG. 10 illustrates the use of this structure 1010 to represent a hierarchical tree 1020. The ET_Complex structure defined above is sufficiently general, however, that virtually any collection metaphor can be represented by it including (but not limited to) arrays (multi-dimensional), stacks, rings, queues, sets, n-trees, binary trees, linked lists etc. The ‘moveTo’, ‘moveFrom’ and ‘nextItem’ fields of the header have been omitted for clarity. The ‘valueR’ field would contain a relative reference to the actual value associated with the tree node (if present), which would be contained in a record of type ET_Simplex. The type ID of this record would be specified in the ‘typeID’ field of the ET_Complex and, assuming the existence of an infrastructure for converting type IDs to a corresponding type and field arrangement, this could be used to examine the contents of the value (which could further contain ET_Offset fields as well).

As FIG. 10 illustrates, ‘A’ 1025 has only one child (namely ‘B’ 1030), both the ‘childHdr’ 1035 and ‘childTail’ 1040 fields reference ‘B’ 1030, this is in contrast to the ‘childHdr’ 1045 and ‘childTail’ 1070 fields of ‘B’ 1030 itself which reflect the fact that ‘B’ 1030 has three children 1050, 1055, 1060. To navigate between children 1050, 1055, 1060, the doubly-linked ‘nextItem’ and ‘prevItem’ fields are used. Finally the ‘parent’ field from the standard header is used to represent the hierarchy. It is easy to see how simply by manipulating the various fields of the ET_Complex structure, arbitrary collection types can be created as can a large variety of common operations on those types. In the example of the tree above, operations might include pruning, grafting, sorting, insertion, rotations, shifts, randomization, promotion, demotion etc. Because the ET_Complex type is ‘known’ to the wrapper layer, it can transparently handle all the manipulations to the ET_Offset fields in order to ensure referential integrity is maintained during all such operations. This ability is critical to situations where large collections of disparate data must be accessed and distributed (while maintaining ‘flatness’) throughout a system.

FIG. 11 illustrates the process for using the memory model to “sort” various structures. A sample structure, named ET_String 1100, could be defined in the following manner (defined below) to perform sorting on variable sized structures: typedef struct ET_String // String Structure {  ET_Hdr hdr; // Standard header  ET_Offset /* ET_StringPtr */ nextString; // ref. to next string  ...  char theString[ 0 ];    // C string (size varies) } ET_String;

Prior to the sort, the ‘nextString’ fields 1110, 1115, 1120, 1125 essentially track the ‘nextItem’ field in the header, indeed ‘un-sort’ can be trivially implemented by taking account of this fact. By accessing the strings in such a list by index (i.e., by following the ‘nextString’ field), users of such a ‘string list’ abstraction can manipulate collections of variable sized strings. When combined with the ability to arbitrarily grow the string records as described previously (using ‘moveTo’ and ‘moveFrom’), a complete and generalized string list manipulation package is relatively easy to implement. The initial ‘Start’ reference 1130 in such a list must obviously come from a distinct record, normally the first record in the handle. For example, one could define a special start record format for containers describing executable code hierarchies. The specific implementation of these ‘start’ records are not important. What is important, however, is that each record type contain a number of ET_Offset fields that can be used as references or ‘anchors’ into whatever logical collection(s) is represented by the other records within the handle.

The process of deleting a structure in this memory model relates not so much to the fields of the header record itself, but rather to the fields of the full structure and the logical relationships between them. In other words, the record itself is not deleted from physical memory, rather it is logically deleted by removing from all logical chains that reference it. The specific manner in which references are altered to point “around” the deleted record will thus vary for each particular record type. FIG. 12 illustrates the situation after deleting “Dog” 1125 from the string list 1100 and ‘C’ 1050 from the tree 1020.

When being deleted, the deleted record is generally ‘orphaned’. In order to more easily identify the record as deleted, a record may be set to a defined record type, such as ‘kOrphanRecord’. This record type could be used during compression operations to identify those records that have been deleted. A record could also be identified as deleted by confirming that it is no longer referenced from any other structure within the handle. Given the complete knowledge that the wrapper layer has of the various fields of the structures within the handle, this condition can be checked with relative ease and forms a valuable double-check when particularly sensitive data is being deleted.

The compression process involves movement of higher structures down to fill the gap and then the subsequent adjustment of all references that span the gap to reduce the reference offset value by the size of the gap being closed during compression. Once again, the fact that the wrapper layer has complete knowledge of all the ET_Offset fields within the structures in the handle make compression a straightforward operation.

The foregoing description of the preferred embodiment of the invention has been presented for the purposes of illustration and description. For example, the term “handle” throughout this description is addressed as it is currently used in the Macintosh OS. This term should not be narrowly construed to only apply to the Macintosh OS, however, as the method and system could be used to enhance any sort of memory management system. The descriptions of the header structures should also not be limited to the embodiments described. While the defined header structures provide examples of the structures that may be used, the plurality of header structures that could in fact be implemented is nearly limitless. Indeed, it is the very flexibility afforded by the memory management system that serves as its greatest strength. For these reasons, this description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teaching. In particular due to the simplicity of the model, hardware based implementations can be envisaged. It is intended that the scope of the invention be limited not by this detailed description, but rather by the claims appended hereto.

APPENDIX 2 SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ANALYZING DATA Inventor: John Fairweather BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Lexical analyzers are generally used to scan sequentially through a sequence or “stream” of characters that is received as input and returns a series of language tokens to the parser. A token is simply one of a small number of values that tells the parser what kind of language element was encountered next in the input stream. Some tokens have associated semantic values, such as the name of an identifier or the value of an integer. For example if the input stream was:

dst=src+dst->moveFrom

After passing through the lexical analyzer, the stream of tokens presented to the parser might be: (tok=1,  string=”dst”) -- i.e., 1 is the token for identifier (tok=100, string=”=”) (tok=1,string=”src”) (tok=101, string=”+”) (tok=1,string=”dst”) (tok=102, string=”->”) (tok=1,string=”moveFrom”)

To implement a lexical analyzer, one must first construct a Deterministic Finite Automaton (DFA) from the set of tokens to be recognized in the language. The DFA is a kind of state machine that tells the lexical analyzer given its current state and the current input character in the stream, what new state to move to. A finite state automaton is deterministic if it has no transitions on input ε (epsilon) and for each state, S, and symbol, A, there is at most one edge labeled A leaving S. In the present art, a DFA is constructed by first constructing a Non-deterministic Finite Automaton (NFA). Following construction of the NFA, the NFA is converted into a corresponding DFA. This process is covered in more detail in most books on compiler theory.

In FIG. 1, a state machine that has been programmed to scan all incoming text for any occurrence of the keywords “dog”, “cat”, and “camel” while passing all other words through unchanged is shown. The NFA begins at the initial state (0). If the next character in the stream is ‘d’, the state moves to 7, which is a non-accepting state. A non-accepting state is one in which only part of the token has been recognized while an accepting state represents the situation in which a complete token has been recognized. In FIG. 1, accepting states are denoted by the double border. From state 7, if the next character is ‘o’, the state moves to 8. This process will then repeat for the next character in the stream. If the lexical analyzer is in an accepting state when either the next character in the stream does not match or in the event that the input stream terminates, then the token for that accepting state is returned. Note that since “cat” and “camel” both start with “ca”, the analyzer state is “shared” for both possible “Lexemes”. By sharing the state in this manner, the lexical analyzer does not need to examine each complete string for a match against all possible tokens, thereby reducing the search space by roughly a factor of 26 (the number of letters in the alphabet) as each character of the input is processed. If at any point the next input token does not match any of the possible transitions from a given state, the analyzer should revert to state 10 which will accept any other word (represented by the dotted lines above). For example if the input word were “doctor”, the state would get to 8 and then there would be no valid transition for the ‘c’ character resulting in taking the dotted line path (i.e., any other character) to state 10. As will be noted from the definition above, this state machine is an NFA not a DFA. This is because from state 0, for the characters ‘c’ and ‘d’, there are two possible paths, one directly to state 10, and the others to the beginnings of “dog” and “cat”, thus we violate the requirement that there be one and only one transition for each state-character pair in a DFA. Implementation of the state diagram set forth in FIG. 1 in software would be very inefficient. This is in part because, for any non-trivial language, the analyzer table will need to be very large in order to accommodate all the “dotted line transitions”. A standard algorithm, often called ‘subset construction’, is used to convert an NFA to a corresponding DFA. One of the problems with this algorithm is that, in the worst-case scenario, the number of states in the resulting DFA can be exponential to the number of NFA states. For these reasons, the ability to construct languages and parsers for complex languages on the fly is needed. Additionally, because lexical analysis is occurring so pervasively and often on many systems, lexical analyzer generation and operation needs to be more efficient.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

The following system and method provides the ability to construct lexical analyzers on the fly in an efficient and pervasive manner. Rather than using a single DFA table and a single method for lexical analysis, the present invention splits the table describing the automata into two distinct tables and splits the lexical analyzer into two phases, one for each table. The two phases consist of a single transition algorithm and a range transition algorithm, both of which are table driven and, by eliminating the need for NFA to DFA conversion, permit the dynamic modification of those tables during operation. A third ‘entry point’ table may also be used to speed up the process of finding the first table element from state 0 for any given input character (i.e, states 1 and 7 in FIG. 1). This third table is merely an optimization and is not essential to the algorithm. The two tables are referred to as the ‘onecat’ table and the ‘catrange’ tables. The onecat table includes records, of type “ET_onecat”, that include a flag field, a catalyst field, and an offset field. The catalyst field of an ET_onecat record specifies the input stream character to which this record relates. The offset field contains the positive (possibly scaled) offset to the next record to be processed as part of recognizing the stream. Thus the ‘state’ of the lexical analyzer in this implementation is actually represented by the current ‘onecat’ table index. The ‘catrange’ table consists of an ordered series of records of type ET_CatRange, with each record having the fields ‘Istat’ (representing the lower bound of starting states), ‘hstat’ (representing the upper bound of starting states), ‘Icat’ (representing the lower bound of catalyst character), ‘hcat’ (representing the upper bound of catalyst character) and ‘estat’ (representing the ending state if the transition is made).

The method of the present invention begins when the analyzer first loops through the ‘onecat’ table until it reaches a record with a catalyst character of 0, at which time the ‘offset’ field holds the token number recognized. If this is not the final state after the loop, the lexical analyzer has failed to recognize a token using the ‘onecat’ table and must now re-process the input stream using the ‘catrange’ table. The lexical analyzer loops re-scanning the ‘catrange’ table from the beginning for each input character looking for a transition where the initial analyzer state lies between the ‘Istat’ and ‘hstat’ bounds, and the input character lies between the ‘Icat’ and ‘hcat’ bounds. If such a state is found, the analyzer moves to the new state specified by ‘estat’. If the table runs out (denoted by a record with ‘Istat’ set to 255) or the input string runs out, the loop exits.

The invention also provides a built-in lexical analyzer generator to create the catrange and onecat tables. By using a two-table approach, the generation phase is extremely fast but more importantly, it can be incremental, meaning that new symbols can be added to the analyzer while it is running. This is a key difference over conventional approaches because it opens up the use of the lexical analyzer for a variety of other purposes that would not normally be possible. The two-phase approach of the present invention also provides significant advantages over standard techniques in terms of performance and flexibility when implemented in software, however, more interesting applications exist when one considers the possibility of a hardware implementation. As further described below, this invention may be implemented in hardware, software, or both.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 illustrates a sample non-deterministic finite automaton.

FIG. 2 illustrates a sample ET_onecat record using the C programming language.

FIG. 3 illustrates a sample ET_catrange record using the C programming language.

FIG. 4 illustrates a state diagram representing a directory tree.

FIG. 5 illustrates a sample structure for a recognizer DB.

FIG. 6 illustrates a sample implementation of the Single Transition Module.

FIG. 7 illustrates the operation of the Single Transition Module.

FIG. 8 illustrates a logical representation of a Single Transition Module implementation.

FIG. 9 illustrates a sample implementation of the Range Transition Module.

FIG. 10 illustrates a complete hardware implementation of the Single Transition Module and the Range Transition Module.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

The following description of the invention references various C programming code examples that are intended to clarify the operation of the method and system. This is not intended to limit the invention as any number of programming languages or implementations may be used.

The present invention provides an improved method and system for performing lexical analysis on a given stream of input. The present invention comprises two distinct tables that describe the automata and splits the lexical analyzer into two phases, one for each table. The two phases consist of a single transition algorithm and a range transition algorithm. A third ‘entry point’ table may also be used to speed up the process of finding the first table element from state 0 for any given input character (i.e, states 1 and 7 in FIG. 1). This third table is merely an optimization and is not essential to the algorithm. The two tables are referred to as the ‘onecat’ table and the ‘catrange’ tables.

Referring now to FIG. 2, programming code illustrating a sample ET_onecat record 200 is provided. The onecat table includes records, of type “ET_onecat”, that include a flag field, a catalyst field, and an offset field. The catalyst field of an ET_onecat record specifies the input stream character to which this record relates. The offset field contains the positive (possibly scaled) offset to the next record to be processed as part of recognizing the stream. Thus the ‘state’ of the lexical analyzer in this implementation is actually represented by the current ‘onecat’ table index. The ‘onecat’ table is a true DFA and describes single character transitions via a series of records of type ET_onecat 200. A variety of specialized flag definitions exist for the flags field 210 but for the purposes of clarity, only ‘kLexJump’ and ‘kNeedDelim’ will be considered. The catalyst field 205 of an ET_onecat record 200 specifies the input stream character to which this record relates. The offset field 215 contains the positive (possibly scaled) offset to the next record to be processed as part of recognizing the stream. Thus the ‘state’ of the lexical analyzer in this implementation is actually represented by the current ‘onecat’ table index. For efficiency, the various ‘onecat’ records may be organized so that for any given starting state, all possible transition states are ordered alphabetically by catalyst character.

The basic algorithm for the first phase of the lexical analyzer, also called the onecat algorithm, is provided. The algorithm begins by looping through the ‘onecat’ table (not shown) until it reaches a record with a catalyst character of 0, at which time the ‘offset’ field 215 holds the token number recognized. If this is not the final state after the loop, the algorithm has failed to recognize a token using the ‘onecat’ table and the lexical analyzer must now re-process the input stream from the initial point using the ‘catrange’ table. ch = *ptr; // ‘ptr’ tbl = &onecat[entryPoint[ch]]; // initialize using 3^(rd) table for ( done = NO ;; ) { tch = tbl->catalyst; state = tbl->flags;  if ( !*ptr ) done = YES; // oops! the source string ran out! if ( tch == ch ) // if ‘ch’ matches catalyst char { // match found, increment to next if ( done ) break; // exit if past the terminating NULL tbl++; // increment pointer if char accepted ptr++; // in the input stream. ch = *ptr; } else if ( tbl->flags & kLexJump ) tbl += tbl->offset; // there is a jump alternative available else break; // no more records, terminate loop } match = !tch && (*ptr is a delimiter || !(state & (kNeedDelim+kLexJump)));  if ( match ) return tbl->offset; // on success, offset field holds token#

Referring now to FIG. 3, sample programming code for creating an ET_Catrange record 300 is shown. The ‘catrange’ table (not shown) consists of an ordered series of records of type ET_CatRange 300. In this implementation, records of type ET_CatRange 300 include the fields ‘Istat’ 305 (representing the lower bound of starting states), ‘hstat’ 310 (representing the upper bound of starting states), ‘Icat’ 315 (representing the lower bound of catalyst character), ‘hcat’ 320 (representing the upper bound of catalyst character) and ‘estat’ 325 (representing the ending state if the transition is made). These are the minimum fields required but, as described above, any number of additional fields or flags may be incorporated.

A sample code implementation of the second phase of the lexical analyzer algorithm, also called the catrange algorithm, is set forth below. tab = tab1 = &catRange[0]; state = 0; ch = *ptr; for (;;) {    // LSTAT byte = 255 ends table if ( tab->lstat == 255 ) break; else if ( ( tab->lstat <= state && state <= tab->hstat ) && ( tab->lcat <= ch && ch <= tab->hcat ) ) {   // state in range & input char a valid catalyst state = tab->estat; // move to final state specified ptr++; // accept character ch = *ptr; if ( !ch ) break; // whoops! the input string ran out tab = tab1; // start again at beginning of table } else tab++;  // move to next record if not end } if ( state > maxAccState || *ptr not a delimiter && *(ptr−1) not a delimiter ) return bad token error return state

As the code above illustrates, the process begins by looping and re-scanning the ‘catRange’ table from the beginning for each input character looking for a transition where the initial analyzer state lies between the ‘Istat’ 305 and ‘hstat’ 310 bounds, and the input character lies between the ‘Icat’ 315 and ‘hcat’ 320 bounds. If such a state is found, the analyzer moves to the new state specified by ‘estat’ 325. If the table runs out (denoted by a record with ‘Istat’ set to 255) or the input string runs out, the loop exits. In the preferred embodiment, a small number of tokens will be handled by the ‘catRange’ table (such an numbers, identifiers, strings etc.) since the reserved words of the language to be tokenized will be tokenized by the ‘onecat’ phase. Thus, the lower state values (i.e. <64) could be reserved as accepting while states above that would be considered non-accepting. This boundary line is specified for a given analyzer by the value of ‘maxAccState’ (not shown).

To illustrate the approach, the table specification below is sufficient to recognize all required ‘catRange’ symbols for the C programming language: 0 1 1 a z <eol> 1 = Identifier 0 1 1 _(— —) <eol> more identifier 1 1 1 0 9 <eol> more identifier 0 0 100 ‘ ’ <eol> ‘ begins character constant 100 100 101 \ \ <eol> a \ begins character escape sequence 101 102 102 0 7 <eol> numeric character escape sequence 101 101 103 x x <eol> hexadecimal numeric character escape sequence 103 103 103 a f <eol> more hexadecimal escape sequence 103 103 103 0 9 <eol> more hexadecimal escape sequence 100 100 2 ‘ ’ <eol> ‘ terminates the character sequence 102 103 2 ‘ ’ <eol> you can have multiple char constants 100 103 100 <eol> 2 = character constant 0 0 10 0 0 <eol> 10 = octal constant 10 10 10 0 7 <eol> more octal constant 0 0 3 1 9 <eol> 3 = decimal number 3 3 3 0 9 <eol> more decimal number 0 0 110 . . <eol> start of fp number 3 3 4 . . <eol> 4 = floating point number 10 10 4 . . <eol> change octal constant to fp # 4 4 4 0 9 <eol> more fp number 110 110 4 . . <eol> more fp number 3 4 111 e e <eol> 5 = fp number with exponent 10 10 111 e e <eol> change octal constant to fp # 111 111 5 0 9 <eol> more exponent 111 111 112 + + <eol> more exponent 0 0 0 \\ <eol> continuation that does not belong to anything 111 111 112 − − <eol> more exponent 112 112 5 0 9 <eol> more exponent 5 5 5 0 9 <eol> more exponent 4 5 6 f f <eol> 6 = fp number with optional float marker 4 5 6 l l <eol> more float marker 10 10 120 x x <eol> beginning hex number 120 120 7 0 9 <eol> 7 = hexadecimal number 120 120 7 a f <eol> more hexadecimal 7 7 7 0 9 <eol> more hexadecimal 7 7 7 a f <eol> more hexadecimal 7 7 8 l l <eol> 8 = hex number with L or U specifier 7 7 8 u u <eol> 3 3 9 l l <eol> 9 = decimal number with L or U specifier 3 3 9 u u <eol> 10 10 11 l l <eol> 11 = octal constant with L or U specifier 10 10 11 u u <eol> 0 0 130 “ ” <eol> begin string constant... 130 130 12 “ ” <eol> 12 = string constant 130 130 13 \\ <eol> 13 = string const with line continuation ‘\’ 13 13 131 0 7 <eol> numeric character escape sequence 131 131 131 0 7 <eol> numeric character escape sequence 13 13 132 x x <eol> hexadecimal numeric character escape sequence 131 132 12 “ ” <eol> end of string 13 13 130 <eol> anything else must be char or escape char 132 132 132 a f <eol> more hexadecimal escape sequence 132 132 132 0 9 <eol> more hexadecimal escape sequence 130 132 130 <eol> anything else is part of the string

In this example, the ‘catRange’ algorithm would return token numbers 1 through 13 to signify recognition of various C language tokens. In the listing above (which is actually valid input to the associated lexical analyzer generator), the 3 fields correspond to the ‘Istat’ 305, ‘hstat’ 310, ‘estat’ 325, ‘lcat’ 315 and ‘hcat’ 320 fields of the ET_CatRange record 300. This is a very compact and efficient representation of what would otherwise be a huge number of transitions in a conventional DFA table. The use of ranges in both state and input character allow us to represent large numbers of transitions by a single table entry. The fact that the table is re-scanned from the beginning each time is important for ensuring that correct recognition occurs by arranging the table elements appropriately. By using this two pass approach, we have trivially implemented all the dotted-line transitions shown in the initial state machine diagram as well as eliminating the need to perform the NFA to DFA transformation. Additionally since the ‘oneCat’ table can ignore the possibility of multiple transitions, it can be optimized for speed to a level not attainable with the conventional NFA->DFA approach.

The present invention also provides a built-in lexical analyzer generator to create the tables described. ‘CatRange’ tables are specified in the format provided in FIG. 3, while ‘oneCat’ tables may be specified via application programming interface or “API” calls or simply by specifying a series of lines of the form provided below.

-   -   [token#] tokenString [.]

As shown above, in the preferred embodiment, a first field is used to specify the token number to be returned if the symbol is recognized. This field is optional, however, and other default rules may be used. For example, if this field is omitted, the last token number+1 may be used instead. The next field is the token string itself, which may be any sequence of characters including whitespace. Finally, if the trailing period is present, this indicates that the ‘kNeedDelim’ flag (the flags word bit for needs delimiter, as illustrated in FIG. 2) is false, otherwise it is true.

Because of the two-table approach, this generation phase is extremely fast. More importantly, however, the two table approach can be incremental. That is, new symbols can be added to the analyzer while it is running. This is a key difference over conventional approaches because it opens up the use of the lexical analyzer for a variety of other purposes that would not normally be possible. For example, in many situations there is a need for a symbolic registration database wherein other programming code can register items identified by a unique ‘name’. In the preferred embodiment, such registries are implemented by dynamically adding the symbol to a ‘oneCat’ table, and then using the token number to refer back to whatever was registered along with the symbol, normally via a pointer. The advantage of this approach is the speed with which both the insertion and the lookup can occur. Search time in the registry is also dramatically improved over standard searching techniques (e.g., binary search). Specifically, search time efficiency (the “Big O” efficiency) to lookup a given word is proportional to the log (base N) of the number of characters in the token, where ‘N’ is the number of different ASCII codes that exist in significant proportions in the input stream. This is considerably better than standard search techniques. Additionally, the trivial nature of the code needed to implement a lookup registry and the fact that no structure or code needs to be designed for insertion, removal and lookup, make this approach very convenient.

In addition to its use in connnection with flat registries, this invention may also be used to represent, lookup, and navigate through hierarchical data. For example, it may be desirable to ‘flatten’ a complete directory tree listing with all files within it for transmission to another machine. This could be easily accomplished by iterating through all files and directories in the tree and adding the full file path to the lexical analyzer database of the present invention. The output of such a process would be a table in which all entries in the table were unique and all entries would be automatically ordered and accessible as a hierarchy.

Referring now to FIG. 4, a state diagram representing a directory tree is shown. The directory tree consists of a directory A containing sub-directories B and C and files F1 and F2 and sub-directory C contains F1 and F3. A function, LX_List( ), is provided to allow alphabetized listing of all entries in the recognizer database. When called successively for the state diagram provided in FIG. 6, it will produce the sequence:

“A:”, “A:B:”, “A:C:”, “A:C:F1”, “A:C:F3”, “A:F1”, “A:F2”

Furthermore, additional routines may be used to support arbitrary navigation of the tree. For example, routines could be provided that will prune the list (LX_PruneList( )), to save the list (LX_SaveListContext( )) and restore the list (LX_RestoreListContext( )). The routine LX_PruneList( ) is used to “prune” the list when a recognizer database is being navigated or treated as a hierarchical data structure. In one embodiment, the routine LX_PruneList( ) consists of nothing more than decrementing the internal token size used during successive calls to LX_List( ). The effect of a call to LX_PruneList( ) is to remove all descendant tokens of the currently listed token from the list sequence. To illustrate the point, assume that the contents of the recognizer DB represent the file/folder tree on a disk and that any token ending in ‘:’ is a folder while those ending otherwise are files. A program could easily be developed to enumerate all files within the folder folder “Disk:MyFiles:” but not any files contained within lower level folders. For example, the following code demonstrates how the LX_PruneList( ) routine is used to “prune” any lower level folders as desired: tokSize = 256; // set max file path length prefix = “Disk:MyFiles:”; toknum = LX_List(theDB,0,&tokSize,0,prefix); // initialize to start folder path while ( toknum != −1 ) // repeat for all files {  toknum = LX_List(theDB,fName,&tokSize,0,prefix); // list next file name  if (toknum != −1 ) // is it a file or a folder ?   if( fName[tokSize−1] == ‘:’ ) // it is a folder    LX_PruneList(theDB) // prune it and all it's children   else // it is a file...    -- process the file somehow }

In a similar manner, the routines LX_SaveListContext( ) and LX_RestoreListContext( ) may be used to save and restore the internal state of the listing process as manipulated by successive calls to LX_List( ) in order to permit nested/recursive calls to LX_List( ) as part of processing a hierarchy. These functions are also applicable to other non-recursive situations where a return to a previous position in the listing/navigation process is desired. Taking the recognizer DB of the prior example (which represents the file/folder tree on a disk), the folder tree processing files within each folder at every level could be recursively walked non-recursively by simply handling tokens containing partial folder paths. If a more direct approach is desired, the recursiveness could be simplified. The following code illustrates one direct and simple process for recursing a tree: void myFunc ( charPtr folderPath ) {  tokSize = 256; // set max file path length  toknum = LX_List(theDB,0,&tokSize,0,folderPath); // initialize to start folder  while (toknum != −1 ) // repeat for all files  {   toknum = LX_List(theDB,fName,&tokSize,0,prefix); // list next file name   if (toknum != −1 ) // is it a file or a folder ?    if ( fName[tokSize−1] == ‘:’ ) // it is a folder     sprintf(nuPath,“%s%s”,folderPath,fName); // create new folder path     tmp = LX_SaveListContext(theDB); // prepare for recursive listing     myFunc(nuPath); // recurse!     LX_RestoreListContext(theDB,tmp); // restore listing context    else // it is a file...     -- process the file somehow  } }

These routines are only a few of the routines that could be used in conjunction with the present invention. Those in the prior art will appreciate that any number of additional routines could be provided to permit manipulation of the DB and lexical analyzer. For example, the following non-exclusive list of additional routines are basic to lexical analyzer use but will not be described in detail since their implementation may be easily deduced from the basic data structures described above:

-   LX_Add( )—Adds a new symbol to a recognizer table. The     implementation of this routine is similar to LX_Lex( ) except when     the algorithm reaches a point where the input token does not match,     it then enters a second loop to append additional blocks to the     recognizer table that will cause recognition of the new token. -   LX_Sub( )—Subtracts a symbol from a recognizer table. This consists     of removing or altering table elements in order to prevent     recognition of a previously entered symbol. -   LX_Set( )—Alters the token value for a given symbol. Basically     equivalent to a call to LX_Lex( ) followed by assignment to the     table token value at the point where the symbol was recognized. -   LX_Init( )—Creates a new empty recognizer DB. -   LX_KillDB( )—Disposes of a recognizer DB. -   LX_FindToken( )—Converts a token number to the corresponding token     string using LX_List( ).

In addition to the above routines, additional routines and structures within a recognizer DB may be used to handle certain aspects of punctuation and white space that may vary between languages to be recognized. This is particularly true if a non-Roman script system is involved, such as is the case for many non-European languages. In order to distinguish between delimiter characters (i.e., punctuation etc.) and non-delimiters (i.e., alphanumeric characters), the invention may also include the routines LX_AddDelimiter( ) and LX_SubDelimiter( ). When a recognizer DB is first created by LX_Init( ), the default delimiters are set to match those used by the English language. This set can then be selectively modified by adding or subtracting the ASCII codes of interest. Whether an ASCII character is a delimiter or not is determined by whether the corresponding bit is set in a bit-array ‘Dels’ associated with the recognizer DB and it is this array that is altered by calls to add or subtract an ASCII code. In a similar manner, determining whether a character is white-space is crucial to determining if a given token should be recognized, particularly where a longer token with the same prefix exists (e.g., Smith and Smithsonian). For this reason, a second array ‘whitespace’ is associated with the recognizer DB and is used to add new whitespace characters. For example an Arabic space character has the ASCII value of the English space plus 128. This array is accessed via LX_AddDelimiter( ) and LX_SubDelimiter( ) functions.

A sample structure for a recognizer DB 500 is set forth in FIG. 5. The elements of the structure 500 are as follows: onecatmax 501 (storing the number of elements in ‘onecat’), catrangemax 502 (storing number of elements in ‘catrange’), lexFlags 503 (storing behavior configuration options), maxToken 504 (representing the highest token number in table), nSymbols 505 (storing number of symbols in table), name 506 (name of lexical recognizer DB 500), Dels 507 (holds delimiter characters for DB), MaxAccState 508 (highest accepting state for catrange), whitespace 509 (for storing additional whitespace characters), entry 510 (storing entry points for each character), onecat 511 (a table for storing single state transitions using record type ET_onecat 200) and catrange 512 (a table storing range transitions and is record type ET_CatRange 400).

As the above description makes clear, the two-phase approach to lexical analysis provides significant advantages over standard techniques in terms of performance and flexibility when implemented in software. Additional applications are enhanced when the invention is imlemented in hardware.

Referring now to FIG. 6, a sample implementation of a hardware device based on the ‘OneCat’ algorithm (henceforth referred to as a Single Transition Module 600 or STM 600) is shown. The STM module 600 is preferably implemented as a single chip containing a large amount of recognizer memory 605 combined with a simple bit-slice execution unit 610, such as a 2610 sequencer standard module and a control input 645. In operation the STM 600 would behave as follows:

-   -   1) The system processor on which the user program resides (not         shown) would load up a recognizer DB 800 into the recognizer         memory 605 using the port 615 formatted as a record of type         ET_onecat 200.     -   2) The system processor would initialize the source of the text         input stream to be scanned. The simplest external interface for         text stream processing might be to tie the ‘Next’ signal 625 to         an incrementing address generator 1020 such that each pulse on         the ‘Next’ line 625 is output by the STM 600 and requests the         system processor to send the next byte of text to the port 630.         The contents of the next external memory location (previously         loaded with the text to be scanned) would then be presented to         the text port 630. The incrementing address generator 1020 would         be reset to address zero at the same time the STM 600 is reset         by the system processor.

Referring now to FIG. 7, another illustration of the operation of the STM 600 is shown. As the figure illustrates, once the ‘Reset’ line 620 is released, the STM 600 fetches successive input bytes by clocking based on the ‘Next’ line 620, which causes external circuitry to present the new byte to input port 630. The execution unit 610 (as shown in FIG. 6) then performs the ‘OneCat’ lexical analyzer algorithm described above. Other hardware implementations, via a sequencer or otherwise, are possible and would be obvious to those skilled in the art. In the simple case, where single word is to be recognized, the algorithm drives the ‘Break’ line 640 high at which time the state of the ‘Match’ line 635 determines how the external processor/circuitry 710 should interpret the contents of the table address presented by the port 615. The ‘Break’ signal 640 going high signifies that the recognizer (not shown) has completed an attempt to recognize a token within the text 720. In the case of a match, the contents presented by the port 615 may be used to determine the token number. The ‘Break’ line 640 is fed back internally within the Lexical Analyzer Module or ‘LAM’ (see FIG. 14) to cause the recognition algorithm to re-start at state zero when the next character after the one that completed the cycle is presented.

Referring now to FIG. 8, a logical representation of an internal STM implementation is shown. The fields/memory described by the ET_onecat 200 structure is now represented by three registers 1110, 1120, 1130, two of 8 bits 1110, 1120 and one of at least 32 bits 1130 which are connected logically as shown. The ‘Break’ signal 640 going high signifies that the STM 600 has completed an attempt to recognize a token within the text stream. At this point external circuitry or software can examine the state of the ‘Match’ line 635 in order to decide between the following actions:

-   -   1) If the ‘Match’ line 635 is high, the external system can         determine the token number recognized simply by examining         recognizer memory 605 at the address presented via the register         1145.     -   2) If the ‘Match’ line 635 is low, then the STM 600 failed to         recognize a legal token and the external system may either         ignore the result, reset the STM 600 to try for a new match, or         alternatively execute the range transition algorithm 500         starting from the original text point in order to determine if a         token represented by a range transition exists. The choice of         which option makes sense at this point is a function of the         application to which the STM 600 is being applied.

The “=?” block 1150, “0?” blocks 1155, 1160, and “Add” block 1170 in FIG. 11 could be implemented using standard hardware gates and circuits. Implementation of the “delim?” block 1165 would require the external CPU to load up a 256*1 memory block with 1 bits for all delimiter characters and 0 bits for all others. Once loaded, the “delim?” block 1165 would simply address this memory with the 8-bit text character 1161 and the memory output (0 or 1) would indicate whether the corresponding character was or was not a delimiter. The same approach can be used to identify white-space characters and in practice a 256*8 memory would be used thus allowing up to 8 such determinations to be made simultaneously for any given character. Handling case insensitive operation is possible via lookup in a separate 256*8 memory block.

In the preferred implementation, the circuitry associated with the ‘OneCat’ recognition algorithm is segregated from the circuitry/software associated with the ‘CatRange’ recognition algorithm. The reason for this segregation is to preserve the full power and flexibility of the distinct software algorithms while allowing the ‘OneCat’ algorithm to be executed in hardware at far greater speeds and with no load on the main system processor. This is exactly the balance needed to speed up the kind of CAM and text processing applications that are described in further detail below. This separation and implementation in hardware has the added advantage of permitting arrangements whereby a large number of STM modules (FIGS. 6 and 7) can be operated in parallel permitting the scanning of huge volumes of text while allowing the system processor to simply coordinate the results of each STM module 600. This supports the development of a massive and scaleable scanning bandwidth.

Referring now to FIG. 9, a sample hardware implementation for the ‘CatRange’ algorithm 500 is shown. The preferred embodiment is a second analyzer module similar to the STM 600, which shall be referred to as the Range Transition Module or RTM 1200. The RTM module 1200 is preferably implemented as a single chip containing a small amount of range table memory 1210 combined with a simple bit-slice execution unit 1220, such as a 2910 sequencer standard module. In operation the RTM would behave as follows:

-   -   1) The system processor (on which the user program resides)         would load up a range table into the range table memory 1210 via         the port 1225, wherein the the range table is formatted as         described above with reference to ET_CatRange 300.     -   2) Initialization and external connections, such as the         control/reset line 1230, next line 1235, match line 1240 and         break line 1245, are similar to those for the STM 900.     -   3) Once the ‘Reset’ line 1230 is released, the RTM 1200 fetches         successive input bytes by clocking based on the ‘Next’ line 1235         which causes external circuitry to present the new byte to port         1250. The execution unit 1220 then performs the ‘CatRange’         algorithm 500. Other implementations, via a sequencer or         otherwise are obviously possible.

In a complete hardware implementation of the two-phase lexical analyzer algorithm, the STM and RTM are combined into a single circuit component known as the Lexical Analyzer Module or LAM 1400. Referring now to FIG. 10, a sample LAM 1400 is shown. The LAM 1400 presents a similar external interface to either the STM 600 or RTM 1200 but contains both modules internally together with additional circuitry and logic 1410 to allow both modules 600, 1200 to be run in parallel on the incoming text stream and their results to be combined. The combination logic 1410 provides the following basic functions in cases where both modules are involved in a particular application (either may be inhibited):

-   -   1) The clocking of successive characters from the text stream         1460 via the sub-module ‘Next’ signals 925, 1235 must be         synchronized so that either module waits for the other before         proceeding to process the next text character.     -   2) The external LAM ‘Match’ signals 1425 and ‘Break’ signals         1430 are coordinated so that if the STM module 900 fails to         recognize a token but the RTM module 1200 is still processing         characters, the RTM 1200 is allowed to continue until it         completes. Conversly, if the RTM 1200 completes but the STM 600         is still in progress, it is allowed to continue until it         completes. If the STM 600 completes and recognizes a token,         further RTM 1200 processing is inhibited.     -   3) An additional output signal “S/R token” 1435 allows external         circuitry/software to determine which of the two sub-modules         600, 1200 recognized the token and if appropriate allows the         retrieval of the token value for the RTM 1200 via a dedicated         location on port 1440. Alternately, this function may be         achieved by driving the address latch to a dedicated value used         to pass RTM 1200 results. A control line 1450 is also provided.

The final stage in implementing very high performance hardware systems based on this technology is to implement the LAM as a standard module within a large programmable gate array which can thus contain a number of LAM modules all of which can operate on the incoming text stream in parallel. On a large circuit card, multiple gate arrays of this type can be combined. In this configuration, the table memory for all LAMs can be loaded by external software and then each individual LAM is dynamically ‘tied’ to a particular block of this memory, much in the same manner that the ET_LexHdl structure (described above) achieves in software. Once again, combination logic similar to the combination logic 1410 utilized between STM 600 and RTM 1200 within a given LAM 1400 can be configured to allow a set of LAM modules 1400 to operate on a single text stream in parallel. This allows external software to configure the circuitry so that multiple different recognizers, each of which may relate to a particular recognition domain, can be run in parallel. This implementation permits the development and execution of applications that require separate but simultaneous scanning of text streams for a number of distinct purposes. The external software architecture necessary to support this is not difficult to imagine, as are the kinds of sophisticated applications, especially for intelligence purposes, for which this capability might find application.

Once implemented in hardware and preferably as a LAM module 1400, loaded and configured from software, the following applications (not exhaustive) can be created:

-   -   1) Content-addressable memory (CAM). In a CAM system, storage is         addressed by name, not by a physical storage address derived by         some other means. In other words, in a CAM one would reference         and obtain the information on “John Smith” simply using the         name, rather than by somehow looking up the name in order to         obtain a physical memory reference to the corresponding data         record. This significantly speeds and simplifies the software         involved in the process. One application area for such a system         is in ultra-high performance database search systems, such as         network routing (i.e., the rapid translation of domains and IP         addresses that occurs during all internet protocol routing)         advanced computing architectures (i.e., non-Von Neuman systems),         object oriented database systems, and similar high performance         database search systems.     -   2) Fast Text Search Engine. In extremely high performance text         search applications such as intelligence applications, there is         a need for a massively parallel, fast search text engine that         can be configured and controlled from software. The present         invention is ideally suited to this problem domain, especially         those applications where a text stream is being searched for key         words in order to route interesting portions of the text to         other software for in-depth analysis. High performance text         search applications can also be used on foreign scripts by using         one or more character encoding systems, such as those developed         by Unicode and specifically UTF-8, which allow multi-byte         Unicode characters to be treated as one or more single byte         encodings.

3) Language Translation. To rapidly translate one language to another, the first stage is a fast and flexible dictionary lookup process. In addition to simple one-to-one mappings, it is important that such a system flexibly and transparently handle the translation of phrases and key word sequences to the corresponding phrases. The present invention is ideally suited to this task.

Other applications. A variety of other applications based on a hardware implementation of the lexical analysis algorithm described are possible including (but not limited to); routing hierarchical text based address strings, sorting applications, searching for repetitive patterns, and similar applications.

The foregoing description of the preferred embodiment of the invention has been presented for the purposes of illustration and description. Any number of other basic features, functions, or extensions of the foregoing method and systems would be obvious to those skilled in the art in light of the above teaching. For example, other basic features that would be provided by the lexical analyzer, but that are not described in detail herein, include case insensitivity, delimiter customization, white space customization, line-end and line-start sensitive tokens, symbol flags and tagging, analyzer backup, and other features of lexical analyzers that are well-known in the prior art. For these reasons, this description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. It is intended that the scope of the invention be limited not by this detailed description but rather by the claims appended hereto.

APPENDIX 3 A SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PARSING DATA Inventor: John Fairweather BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The analysis and parsing of textual information is a well-developed field of study, falling primarily within what is commonly referred to as ‘compiler theory’. At its most basic, a compiler requires three components, a lexical analyzer which breaks the text stream up into known tokens, a parser which interprets streams of tokens according to a language definition specified via a meta-language such as Backus-Naur Form (BNF), and a code generator/interpreter. The creation of compilers is conventionally a lengthy and off-line process, although certain industry standard tools exist to facilitate this process such as LEX and YACC from the Unix world. There are a large number of textbooks available on the theory of predictive parsers and any person skilled in this art would have basic familiarity with this body of theory.

Parsers come in two basic forms, “top-down” and “bottom-up”. Top-down parsers build the parse tree from the top (root) to the bottom (leaves), bottom-up parsers build the tree from the leaves to the root. For our purposes, we will consider only the top-down parsing strategy known as a predictive parser since this most easily lends itself to a table driven (rather than code driven) approach and is thus the natural choice for any attempt to create a configurable and adaptive parser. In general, predictive parsers can handle a set of possible grammars referred to as LL(1) which is a subset of those potentially handled by LR parsers (LL(1) stands for ‘Left-to-right, using Leftmost derivations, using at most 1 token look-ahead’). Another reason that a top-down algorithm is preferred is the ease of specifying these parsers directly in BNF form, which makes them easy to understand by most programmers. Compiler generators such as LEX and YACC generally use a far more complex specification methods including generation of C code which must then be compiled, and thus is not adaptive or dynamic. For this reason, bottom-up table driven techniques such as LR parsing (as used by YACC) are not considered suitable.

What is needed is a process that can rapidly (i.e., within seconds) generate a complete compiler from scratch and then apply that compiler in an adaptive manner to new input, the ultimate goal being the creation of an adaptive compiler, i.e., one that can alter itself in response to new input patterns in order to ‘learn’ to parse new patterns appearing in the input and to perform useful work as a result without the need to add any new compiled code. This adaptive behavior is further described Appendix 1 with respect to a lexical analyzer (referred to in the claims as the “claimed lexical analyzer”). The present invention provides a method for achieving the same rapid, flexible, and extensible generation in the corresponding parser.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

The present invention dislcoses a parser that is totally customizable via the BNF language specifications as well as registered functions as described below. The are two principal routines: (a) PS_MakeDB( ), which is a predictive parser generator algorithm, and (b) PS_Parse( ), which is a generic predictive parser that operates on the tables produced by PS_MakeDB( ). The parser generator PS_MakeDB( ) operates on a description of language grammar, and constructs predictive parser tables that are passed to PS_Parse( ) in order to parse the grammar correctly. There are many algorithms that may be used by PS_MakeDB( ) to generate the predictive parser tables, as described in many books on compiler theory. It consists essentially of computing the FIRST and FOLLOW sets of all grammar symbols (defined below) and then using these to create a predictive parser table. In order to perform useful action in response to inputs, this invention extends the BNF language to allow the specification of reverse-polish plug-in operation specifiers by enclosing such extended symbols between ‘<’ and ‘>’ delimiters. A registration API is provided that allows arbitrary plug-in functions to be registered with the parser and subsequently invoked as appropriate in response to a reverse-polish operator appearing on the top of the parser stack. The basic components of a complete parser/interpreter in this methodology are as follows:

The routine PS_Parse( ) itself (described below)

The language BNF and LEX specifications.

A plug-in ‘resolver 400’ function, called by PS_Parse( ) to resolve new input (described below)

One or more numbered plug-in functions used to interpret the embedded reverse-polish operators.

The ‘langLex’ parameter to PS_Parse( ) allows you to pass in the lexical analyzer database (created using LX_MakeDB( )) to be used to recognize the target language. There are a number of restrictions on the token numbers that can be returned by this lexical analyzer when used in conjunction with the parser. These are as follows:

-   -   1) The parser generator has it's own internal lexical analyzer         which reserves token numbers 59 . . . 63 for recognizing certain         BNF symbols (described below) therefore these token numbers         cannot be used by the target language recognizer. Token numbers         from 1 . . . 63 are reserved by the lexical analyzer to         represent ‘accepting’ states in the ‘catRange’ token recognizer         table, these token numbers are therefore not normally used by a         lexical analyzer ‘oneCat’ token recognizer. What this means then         is that instead of having capacity for 63 variable content         tokens (e.g., names, numbers, symbols etc) in your target         language, you are restricted to a maximum of 58 when using the         parser.     -   2) If there are multiple names for a give symbol, then the         multiplicity should be restricted to the lexical analyzer         description, only one of the alternatives should be used in the         parser tables.     -   3) In order to construct predictive parser tables, it is         necessary to build up a 2-dimensional array where one axis is         the target language token number and the other axis is the         non-terminal symbols of the BNF grammar. The parser-generator is         limited to grammars having no more than 256 non-terminal grammar         symbols, however in order to avoid requiring MASSIVE amounts of         memory and time to compute the parsing table, the number of         terminal symbols (i.e., those recognized by the lexical analyzer         passed in ‘langLex’) should be limited to 256 also. This means         that the lexical analyzer should never return any token number         that is greater than ‘kMaxTerminalSym’. For example, token         numbers 1 . . . 59 are available for use as accepting states for         the ‘catrange’ recognizer while tokens 64 . . . 255 are         available for use with the ‘oneCat’ recognizer.

The invention also provides a solution for applications in which a language has token numbers that use the full 32-bits provided by LEX. Immediately after calling the ‘langLex’ lexical analyzer to fetch the next token in the input stream, PS_Parse( ) calls the registered ‘resolver 400’ function with a ‘no action’ parameter, (normally no action is exactly what is required) but this also provides an opportunity to the plug-in code to alter the token number (and token size etc.) to a value that is within the permitted range.

There are also many other aspects of the invention that allow the parser to accept or process languages that are considerably more complex than LL(1). For example, suppose a recognizer is programmed to recognize the names of people (for which there are far more than 256 possibilities) so when a ‘no-action’ call is initiated, the function PS_SetCurrToken( ) could be used to alter the token number to 58 say. Then in your BNF grammar, you specify a token number of 58 (e.g., <58:Person Name>) wherever you expect to process a name. The token string will be available to the plug-in and resolver 400 functions on subsequent calls and could easily reconstitute the original token number and the plug-in code could be programmed to call ‘langLex’ using PS_LangLex( ). Other applications and improvements are also disclosed and claimed in this application as described in further detail below.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 provides a sample BNF specification;

FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a set of operations as performed by the parser of the present invention;

FIG. 3 provides a sample code fragment for a predefined plug-in that can work in conjunction with the parser of the present invention; and

FIG. 4 provides sample code for a resolver of the present invention.

Appendix A provides code for a sample Application Programming Interface (API) for the parser of the present invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

As described above, the parser of this invention utilizes the lexical analyzer described in Appendix 1, and the reader may refer to this incorporated patent application for a more detailed explanation of some of the terms used herein. For illustration purposes, many of the processes described in this application are accompnaied by samples of the computer code that could be used to perform such functions. It would be clear to one skilled in the art that these code samples are for illustration purposes only and should not be interepreted as a limitation on the claimed inventions.

The present invention dislcoses a parser that is totally customizable via the BNF language specifications as well as registered functions as described below. The are two principal routines: (a) PS_MakeDB( ), which is a predictive parser generator algorithm, and (b) PS_Parse( ), which is a generic predictive parser that operates on the tables produced by PS_MakeDB( ). The parser generator PS_MakeDB( ) operates on a description of language grammar, and constructs predictive parser tables that are passed to PS_Parse( ) in order to parse the grammar correctly. PS_MakeDB( ) has the following function prototype: ET_ParseHdl PS_MakeDB (  // Make a predictive parser for PS_Parse( )   charPtr bnf, // I:C string specifying grammar's BNF   ET_LexHdl  langLex,  // I:Target language lex (from LX_MakeDB)   int32  options,  // I:Various configuration options   int32  parseStackSize, // I:Max. depth of parser stack, 0=default   int32  evalStackSize // I:Max. depth of evaluation stack, 0=default )  // R:handle to created DB,

The ‘bnf’ parameter to PS_MakeDB( ) contains a series of lines that specify the BNF for the grammar in the form:

non_terminal ::=production_(—)1 <or> production_(—)2 <or> . . .

Where production_(—)1 and production_(—)2 consist of any sequence of Terminal (described in lexical analyzer passed in to PS_MakeDB), or Non-Terminal (langLex) symbols provided that such symbols are greater than or equal to 64. Productions may continue onto the next line if required but any time a non-blank character is encountered in the first position of the line, it is assumed to be the start of a new production list. The grammar supplied must be unambiguous and LL(1).

The parser generator uses the symbols ::=, <or >, and <null> to represent BNF productions. The symbols <opnd>, <bkup>, and the variable (‘catRange’) symbols <@nn:mm[:hint text]> and <nn:arbitrary text> also have special meaning and are recognized by the built in parser-generator lexical analyzer. The parser generator will interpret any sequence of upper or lower case letters (a . . . z) or numbers (0 . . . 9) or the underscore character ‘_’, that begins with a letter or underscore, and which is not recognized by, or which is assigned a token number in the range 1-63 by, the lexical analyzer passed in ‘langLex’, as a non-terminal grammar symbol (e.g., program, expression, if_statement etc.), these symbols are added to the parser generators grammar symbol list (maximum of 256 symbols) and define the set of non-terminals that make up the grammar. There is no need to specify this set, it is deduced from the BNF supplied. One thing that is very important however, is that the first such symbol encountered in the BNF becomes the root non-terminal of the grammar (e.g., program). This symbol is given special meaning by the parser and thus it must appear on the left hand side of the first production specified in the BNF. The <endf> symbol is used to indicate where the expected end of the input string will occur and its specification cannot be omitted from the BNF. Normally, as in the example below <endf> occurs at the end of the root non-terminal production.

Referring now to FIG. 1, a sample BNF specification is provided. This BNF gives a relatively complete description of the C language expression syntax together with enforcement of all operator precedence specified by ANSI and is sufficient to create a program to recognize and interpret C expressions. As FIG. 1 demonstrates, the precedence order may be specified simply by choosing the order in which one production leads to another with the lowest precedence grammar constructs/operators being refined through a series of productions into the higher precedence ones. Note also that many productions lead directly to themselves (e.g., more_statements ::=<null> <or > statement more_statements); this is the mechanism used to represent the fact that a list of similar constructs is permitted at this point.

The syntax for any computer language can be described either as syntax diagrams or as a series of grammar productions similar to that above (ignoring the weird ‘@’ BNF symbols for now). Using this syntax, the code illustrated in FIG. 1 could easily be modified to parse any progams in any number of different computer languages simply by entering the grammar productions as they appear in the language's specification. The way of specifying a grammar as illustrated in FIG. 1 is a custom variant of the Backus-Naur Form (or BNF). It is the oldest and easiest to understand means of describing a computer language. The symbols enclosed between ‘<’ ‘>’ pairs plus the ‘::=’ symbol are referred to as “meta-symbols”. These are symbols that are not part of the language but are part of the language specification. A production of the form (non_terminal ::=production_(—)1 <or > production_(—)2) means that there are two alternative constructs that ‘non-terminal’ can be comprised or, they are ‘production_(—)1’ or ‘production_(—)2’.

The grammar for many programming languages may contain hundreds of these productions, for example, the definition of Algol 60 contains 117. An LL(1) parser must be able to tell at any given time what production out of a series of productions is the right one simply by looking at the current token in the input stream and the non-terminal that it currently has on the top of it's parsing stack. This means, effectively, that the sets of all possible first tokens for each production appearing on the right hand side of any grammar production must not overlap. The parser must be able to look at the token in the input stream and tell which production on the right hand side is the ‘right one’. The set of all tokens that might start any given non-terminal symbol in the grammar is known as the FIRST set of that non-terminal. When designing a language to be processed by this package, it is important to ensure that these FIRST sets are not defined consistently. In order to understand how to write productions for an LL(1) parser, it is important to understand recursion in a grammar and the difference between left and right recursion in particular.

Recursion is usually used in grammars to express a list of things separated by some separator symbol (e.g. comma). This can be expressed either as “<A> ::=<A>, <B>” or “<A> ::=<B>, <A>”. The first form is left recursive the second form is known as right recursive. The production “more_statements ::=<null> <or > statement more_statements” above is an example of a right recursive production. Left recursive statements are not permitted because of the risk of looping during parsing. For example, if the parser tries to use a production of the form ‘<A> ::=<A> anything’ then it will fall into an infinite loop trying to expand <A>. This is known as left recursion. Left recursion may be more subtle, as in the pair of productions ‘<S> ::=<X> a <or > b’ and ‘<X> ::=<S> c <or > d’. Here the recursion is indirect; that is the parser expands ‘<S>‘into ’<X> a’, then it subsequently expands ‘<X>’ into ‘<S> c’ which gets it back to trying to expand ‘<S>’, thereby creating an infinite loop. This is known as indirect left recursion. All left recursion of this type must be eliminated from grammar before being processed by the parser. A simple method for accomplishing this proceeds as follows: replace all productions of the form ‘<A> ::=<A> anything’ (or indirect equivalents) by a set of productions of the form “<A> ::=tl more_tl <or > . . . <or > tn more_tn” where tl . . . tn are the language tokens (or non-terminal grammar symbols) that start the various different forms of ‘<A>’.

A second problem with top down parsers, in general, is that the order of the alternative productions is important in determining if the parser will accept the complete language or not. On way to avoid this problem is to require that the FIRST sets of all productions on the right hand side be non-overlapping. Thus, in conventional BNF, it is permissible to write: expression::=element <or > element+expression <or > element*expression

To meet the requirements of PS_MakeDB( ) and of an LL(1) parser, this BNF statement may be reformulated into a pair of statements viz: expression::= element rest_of_expression rest_of_expression ::= <null> <or> + expression <or> * expression

As can be seen, the ‘element’ token has been factored out of the two alternatives (a process known as left-factoring) in order to avoid the possibility of FIRST sets that have been defined more than once. In addition, this process has added a new symbol to the BNF meta-language, the <null> symbol. A <null> symbol is used to indicate to the parser generator that a particular grammar non-terminal is nullable, that is, it may not in fact be present at all in certain input streams. There are a large number of examples of the use of this technique in the BNF grammar illustrated in FIG. 1 such as statement 100.

The issues above discuss the manner in which LL(1) grammars may be created and used. LL(1) grammars, however, can be somewhat restrictive and the parser of the present invention is capable of accepting a much larger set by the use of deliberate ambiguity. Consider the grammar:

operand ::=expression <or > (address_register)

This might commonly occur when specifying assembly language syntax. The problem is that this is not LL(1) since expression may itself start with a ‘(’ token, or it may not, thus when processing operand, the parser may under certain circumstances need to look not at the first, but at the second token in the input stream to determine which alternative to take. Such a parser would be an LL(2) parser. The problem cannot be solved by factoring out the ‘(’ token as in the expression example above because expressions do not have to start with a ‘(’. Thus without extending the language beyond LL(1) the nornal parser be unable to handle this situation. Consider however the modified grammar fragment: operand   ::= .... <or> ( expr_or_indir <or> expression expr_or_indir ::= Aregister ) <or> expression)

Here we have a production for operand which is deliberately ambiguous because it has a multiply defined first set since ‘(’ is in FIRST of both of the last two alternatives. The modified fragment arranges the order of the alternatives such that the parser will take the “(expr_or_indir” production first and should it fail to find an address register following the initial ‘(’token, the parser will then take the second production which correctly processes “expression)” since expression itself need not begin with a ‘(’ token. If this case were pmeritted, the parser would have the equivalent of a two token look-ahead hence the language it can accept is now LL(2).

Alternatively, an options parameter ‘kIgnoreAmbiguities’ could be passed to PS_MakeDB( ) to cause it to accept grammars containing such FIRST set ambiguities. On problem with this approach, however, is that it can no longer verify the correctness of the grammar meaning that the user must ensure that the first production can always be reduced to the second production when such a grammatical trick is used. As such, such a paramter should only be used when the grammar is well-understood.

Grammars can get considerably nastier than LL(2). Consider the problem of parsing the complete set of 68 K assembly language addressing modes, or more particularly the absolute, indirect, pre-decrement and post-increment addressing modes. The absolute and indirect syntax was presented above, however the pre-decrement addressing mode adds the form “−(Aregister)”, while the post-increment adds the form “(Aregister)+”. An LL(3) parser would be needed to handle the predecrement mode since the parser cannot positively identify the predecrement mode until it has consumed both the leading ‘−’ and ‘(’ tokens in the input stream. An LL(4) parser is necessary to recognize the postincrement form. One option is to just left-factor out the “(Aregister)” for the postincrement form. This approach would work if the only requirement was recognition of a valid assembly syntax. To the extent that the parser is being used to perform some useful function, however, this approach will not work. Instead, this can be accomplished by inserting a reverse polish plug-in operator. The polish plug-in operator calls for the form <@n:m[:hint text]> into the grammar. Whenever the parser is exposed to such an operator on the top of the parsing stack, it calls it in order to accomplish some sort of semantic action or processing. Assuming a different plug-in is called in order to handle each of the different 68K addressing modes, it is important to know what addressing mode is presented in order to ensure that the proper plug-in is called. In order to do this, the present invention extends the parser language set to be LL(n) where ‘n’ could be quite large.

The parser of the present invention extend the parser language in this fashion by providing explicit control of limited parser back-up capabilities. One way to provide these capabilities is by adding the <bkup> meta-symbol. Backing up a parser is complex since the parsing stack must be repaired and the lexical analyzer backed-up to an earlier point in the token stream in order to try an alternative production. Nonetheless, the PS_Parse( ) parser is capable of limited backup within a single input line by use of the <bkup> flag. Consider the modified grammar fragment: operand   ::= ... <or> ( Aregister <bkup> areg_indirect <or> abs_or_displ <or> ... abs_or_displ ::= − ( ARegister <bkup> ) <@1:1> <or> expression <@1:2> areg_indirect ::= ) opt_postinc opt_postinc   ::= <@1:3> <or> + <@1:4>

A limited backup is provided through the following methodology. Let us assume that <@1:1> is the handler for the predecrement mode, <@1:2> for the absolute mode, <@1:3> for the indirect mode, and <@1:4> for the postincrement mode. When the parser encounters a ‘(’ token it will push on the “(Aregister <bkup> areg_indirect” production. Whenever the parser notices the presence of the <bkup> symbol in the production being pushed, however, it saves it's own state as well as that of the input lexical analyzer. Parsing continues and the ‘(’ is accepted. Now lets assume instead that the input was actually an expression so when the parser tries to match the ‘ARegister’ terminal that is now on the top of it's parsing stack, it fails. Without the backup flag, this is considered a syntax error and the parser aborts. Because the parser has a saved state, however, the parser restores the backup of the parser and lexical analyzer state to that which existed at the time it first encountered the ‘(’ symbol. This time around, the parser causes the production that immediately follows the one containing the <bkup> flag to be selected in preference to the original. Since the lexical analyzer has also been backed up, the first token processed is once again ‘(’ and parsing proceeds normally through “abs_or_displ” to “expression” and finally to invokation of plug-in <@1:2> as appropriate for the absolute mode.

Note that a similar but slightly different sequence is caused by the <bkup> flag in the first production for “abs_or_displ” and that in all cases, the plug-in that is appropriate to the addressing mode encountered will be invoked and no other. Thus, by using explicit ambiguity plus controlled parser backup, the present invention provides a parser capable of recognizing languages from a set of grammars that are considerably larger than those normally associated with predictive parsing techniques. Indeed the set is sufficiently large that it can probably handle practically any computer programming language. By judicious use of the plug-in and resolver 400 architectures described below, this language set can be further extended to include grammars that are not context-free (e.g., English,) and that cannot be handled by conventional predictive parsers.

In order to build grammars for this parser, it is also important to understand is the concept of a FOLLOW set. For any non-terminal grammar symbol X, FOLLOW(X) is the set of terminal symbols that can appear immediately to the right of X in some sentential form. In other words, it is the set of things that may come immediately after that grammar symbol. To build a predictive parser table, PS_MakeDB( ) must compute not only the FIRST set of all non-terminals (which determines what to PUSH onto the parsing stack), but also the FOLLOW sets (which determine when to POP the parsing stack and move to a higher level production). If the FOLLOW sets are not correct, the parser will never pop its stack and eventually will fail. For this reason; unlike for FIRST sets, ambiguity in the FOLLOW sets is not permitted. What this means is that for any situation in a grammar, the parser must be able to tell when it is done with a production by looking at the next token in the input stream (i.e., the first token of the next production). PS_MakeDB( ) will reject any grammar containing ambiguous FOLLOW sets.

Before illustrating how the parser of the present invention can be used to accomplish specific tasks, it is important understand how PS_Parse( ) 205 actually accomplishes the parsing operation. Referring now to FIG. 2, the parsing function of the present invention is shown. PS_Parse( ) 205 maintains two stacks, the first is called the parsing stack 210 and contains encoded versions of the grammar productions specified in the BNF. The second stack is called the evaluation stack 215. Every time the parser accepts/consumes a token in the input stream in the range 1 . . . 59, it pushes a record onto this evaluation stack 215; Records on this stack 215 can have values that are either integer, real, pointer or symbolic. When the record is first pushed onto the stack 215, the value is always ‘symbolic’ since the parser itself does not know how to interpret symbols returned by the lexical analyzer 250 that lie in this range. A symbolic table entry 220 contains the token number recognized by the ‘langLex’ lexical analyzer 250, together with the token string. In the language defined in FIG. 1, the token number for identifier is 1 (i.e. line 110) while that for a decimal integer is 3 (i.e., line 115), thus if the parser 205 were to encounter the token stream “A+10”, it would add two symbol records to the evaluation stack 215. The first would have token number 1 and token string “A” and, the second would have token number 3 and token string “10”. At the time the parser 205 processes an additive expression such as “A+10”, it's parsing (not evaluation) stack 210 would appear as “mult_expr+mult_expr <@0:15>” where the symbol on the left is at the top of the parsing stack 210. As the parser 205 encounters the ‘A’ in the string “A+10”, it resolves mult_expression until it eventually accepts the ‘A’ token, pops it off the parsing stack 210, and pushes a record onto the evaluation stack 215. So now the parsing stack 210 looks like “+mult_expr <@0:15>” and, the evaluation stack 215 contains just one element “[token=1,String=‘A’ ]”. The parser 205 then matches the ‘+’ operator on the stack with the one in the input and pops the parsing stack 210 to obtain “mult_expr <@0:15>”. Parsing continues with the input token now pointing at the 10 until it too is accepted. This process yields a parsing stack 210 of “<@0:15>” and an evaluation stack 215 of “[token=3,String=‘10’][token=1,String=‘A’ ]” where the left hand record is considered to be the top of the stack.

At this point, the parser 205 recognizes that it has exposed a reverse-polish plug-in operator on the top of its parsing stack 210 and pops it, and then calls the appropriate plug-in, which, in this case, is the built in add operation provided by PS_Evaluate( ) 260, a predefined plug-in called plug-in zero 260. When the parser 205 calls plug-in zero 260, the parser 205 passes the value 15 to the plug-in 260. In this specific case, 15 means add the top two elements of the parsing stack, pop the stack by one, and put the result into the new top of stack. This behavior is exactly analogous to that performed by any reverse polish calculator. This means that the top of the evaluation stack 215 now contains the value A+10 and the parser 205 has actually been used to interpret and execute a fragment of C code. Since there is provision for up to 63 application defined plug-in functions, this mechanism can be used to perform any arbitrary processing as the language is parsed. Since the stack 215 is processed in reverse polish manner, grammar constructs may be nested to arbitrary depth without causing confusion since the parser 205 will already have collapsed any embedded expressions passed to a higher construct. Hence, whenever a plug-in is called, the evaluation stack 215 will contain the operands to that plug-in in the expected positions.

To illustrate how a plug-in might look, FIG. 3 provides a sample code fragment from a predefined plug-in that handles the ‘+’ operator (TOF_STACK is defined as 0, NXT_STACK as 1). As FIG. 3 illustrates, this plug-in first evaluates 305 the values of the top two elements of the stack by calling PS_EvalIdent( ). This function invokes the registered ‘resolver 400’ function in order to convert a symbolic evaluation stack record to a numeric value (see below for description of resolver 400). Next the plug-in must determine 310 the types of the two evaluation stack elements (are they real or integer?). This information is used in a case statement to ensure that C performs the necessary type conversions on the values before they are used in a computation. After selecting the correct case block for the types of the two operands, the function calls PS_SetiValue( ) or PS_SetfValue( ) 315 as appropriate to set the numeric value of the NXT_STACK element of the evaluation stack 215 to the result of adding the two top stack elements. Finally, at the end of the routine, the evaluation stack 215 is popped 220 to move the new top of the stack to what was the NXT_STACK element. This is all it takes to write a reverse polish plug-in operator. This aspect of the invention permits a virtually unlimited number of support routines that could be developed to allow plug-ins to manipulate the evaluation stack 215 in this manner.

Another problem that has been addressed with the plug-in architecture of the present invention is the problem of having the plug-in function determine the number of parameters that were passed to it; for instance, a plug-in would need to know the number of parameters in order to process the C printf( ) function (which takes a variable number of arguments). If a grammar does not force the number of arguments (as in the example BNF above for the production “<opnd> (parameter_list) <@1:1>”, then a <opnd> meta-symbol can be added at the point where the operand list begins. The parser 205 uses this symbol to determine how many operands were passed to a plug-in in response to a call requesting this information. Other than this purpose, the <opnd> meta-symbol is ignored during parsing. The <opnd> meta-symbol should always start the right hand side (RHS) of a production in order to ensure correct operand counting. For example, the production: primary::=<9:Function> <opnd> (parameter_list) <@1:1>

Will result in an erroneous operand count at run time, while the production pair below will not: primary     ::= <9:Function> rstof_fn_call <@1:1> restof_fn_call  ::= <opnd> ( parameter_list )

The last issue is how to actually get the value of symbols into the parser 205. This is what the symbols in the BNF of the form “<n:text string>” are for. The numeric value of ‘n’ must lie between 1 and 59 and it refers to the terminal symbol returned by the lexical analyzer 250 passed in via ‘langLex’ to PS_MakeDB( ). It is assumed that all symbols in the range 1 . . . 59 represent ‘variable tokens’ in the target language. That is, tokens whose exact content may vary (normally recognized by a LEX catrange table) in such a way that the string of characters within the token carry additional meaning that allows a ‘value’ to be assigned to that token. Examples of such variable tokens are identifiers, integers, real numbers etc. A routine known as a ‘resolver 400’ will be called whenever the value of one of these tokens is required or as each token is first recognized. In the BNF illustrated in FIG. 1, the lexical analyzer 250 supplied returns token numbers 3, 7, 8, 9, 10 or 11 for various types of C integer numeric input; 4, 5, and 6 for various C real number formats; 1 for a C identifier (i.e., non-reserved word); and 2 for a character constant.

Referring now to FIG. 4, a simple resolver 400 which converts these tokens into the numeric values required by the parser 205 (assuming that identifiers are limited to single character values from A . . . Z or a . . . z) is shown. As FIG. 3 illustrates, when called to evaluate a symbol, the resolver 400 determines which type of symbol is involved by the lexical analyzer token returned. It then calls whatever routine is appropriate to convert the contents of the token string to a numeric value. In the example above, this is trivial because the lexical analyzer 250 has been arranged to recognize C language constructs. Hence we can call the C I/O library routines to make the conversion. Once the value has been obtained, the resolver 400 calls the applicable routine and the value is assigned to the designated evaluation stack 215 entry. The resolver 400 is also called whenever a plug-in wishes to assign a value to a symbolic evaluation stack 215 entry by running the ‘kResolver Assign’ case block code. In this case, the value is passed in via the function parameters and the resolver 400 uses the token string in the target evaluation stack 215 entry to determine how and where to store the value.

The final purpose of the resolver function 400 is to examine and possibly edit the incoming token stream in order to effectively provide unlimited grammar complexity. For example, consider the problem of a generalized query language that uses the parser. It must define a separate sub-language for each different container type that may be encountered in a query. In such a case, a resolver function 400 could be provided that recognizes the beginning of such a sub-language sequence (for example a SQL statement) and modifies the token returned to consume the entire sequence. The parser 205 itself would then not have to know the syntax of SQL but would simply pass the entire SQL statement to the selected plug-in as the token string for the symbol returned by the recognizer. By using this approach, an application using PS_Parse( ) is capable of processing virtually any grammar can be built.

The basic Application Programming Interface (API) to the parser 205 of this invention is given below. The discussion that follows describes the basic purpose of these various API calls. Sample code for many of these functions is provided in Appendix A.

PS_SetParserTag( ), PS_GetParserTag( ). These functions get and permit modification of a number of numeric tag values associated with a parser 205. These values are not used by internal parser 205 code and are available for custom purposes. This is often essential when building custom parsing applications upon this API.

PS_Pop( ), PS_Push( ). The functions pop or push the parser 205 evaluation stack 215 and are generally called by plug-ins.

PS_PushParserState( ), PS_PopParserState( ). Push/Pop the entire internal parser 205 state. This capability can be used to implement loops, procedure calls or other similar interpreted language constructs. These functions may be called within a parser plug-in in order to cause a non-local transfer of the parser state. The entire parser state, including as a minimum the evaluation stack 215, parser stack 210, and input line buffer must be saved/restored.

PS_ParseStackElem( ). This function returns the current value of the specified parsing stack 210 element (usually the top of the stack). This stack should not be confused with the evaluation stack 215 to which most other stack access functions in this API refer. As described above, the parser stack 210 is used internally by the parser 205 for predictive parsing purposes. Values below 64 are used for internal purposes and to recognize complex tokens such as identifiers or numbers, values above 64 tend to be either terminal symbols in the language being parsed, or non-terminals that are part of the grammar syntax definition (>=32256). Plug-ins have no direct control of the parsing stack 210, however they may accomplish certain language tricks by knowing the current top of stack and altering the input stream perceived by the parser 205 as desired.

PS_PopTopOfParseStack( ),PS_PushTopOfParseStack( ).

PS_PopTopOfParseStack( ) pops and discards the top of the parsing stack 210 (see PS_TopOfParseStack). This is not needed under normal circumstances, however this technique can be used to discard unwanted terminal symbols off the stack 210 in cases where the language allows these to be optional under certain circumstances too complex to describe by syntax.

PS_WillPopParseStack( ). In certain circumstances, it may be necessary for a parser recognizer function to determine if the current token will cause the existing parser stack 210 to be popped, that is “is the token in the FOLLOW set of the current top of the parse?” This information can be used to terminate specialized modes where the recognizer loops through a set of input tokens returning −3, which causes the parser 205 to bulk consume input. A parameter is also provided that allows the caller to determine where in the parsing stack 210 the search can begin, normally this would be the top of the stack i.e., parameter=0.

PS_IsLegalToken( ). This function can be used to determine if a specific terminal token is a legal starting point for a production from the specified non-terminal symbol. Among other things, this function may be used within resolver 400 functions to determine if a specific token number will cause a parsing error if returned given the current state of the parsing stack. This ability allows resolver 400 functions to adjust the tokens they return based on what the parse state is.

PS_GetProduction( ). This function obtains the parser production that would replace the specified non-terminal on the stack 210,215 if the specified terminal were encountered in the input. This information can be used to examine future parser 205 behavior given the current parser 205 state and input. The [0] element of each element of the production returned contains the terminal or non-terminal symbol concerned and can be examined using routines like PS_IsPostFixOperator( ).

PS_IsPostFixOperator( ) determines if the specified parse stack element corresponds to the postfix operator specified.

PS_MakeDB( ). This function creates a complete predictive parsing database for use with PS_Parse( ). If successful, returns a handle to the created DB, otherwise returns zero. The algorithm utilized by this function to construct a predictive parser 205 table can be found in any good reference on compiler theory. The parser 205 utilizes a supplied lexical analyzer as described in Appendix 1. When no longer required, the parser 205 can be disposed using PS_KillDB( ).

PS_DisgardToken( ). This function can be called from a resolver 400 or plug-in to cause the current token to be discarded. In the case of a resolver 400, the normal method to achieve this effect is to return −3 as the resolver 400 result, however, calling this function is an alternative. In the case of a plug-in, a call to this function will cause an immediate call to the resolver 400 in order to acquire a new token.

PS_RegisterParser( ), PS_DeRegisterParser( ), PS_ResolveParser( ), PS_CloneDB( ). These routines are all associated with maintaining a cache of recently constructed parsers so that subsequent invocations of parsers for identical languages can be met instantaneously. The details of this cache are not pertinent to this invention.

PS_LoadBNF( ), PS_LoadBlock( ), PS_ListLanguages( ). These routines are all associated with obtaining the BNF specification for a parser 205 from a text file containing a number of such specifications. The details of this process are not pertinent to this invention.

PS_StackCopy( ). This function copies one element of a parser stack 210 to another.

PS_SetStack( ) sets an element of a parsing stack 210 to the designated type and value.

PS_CallBuiltInLex( ). This function causes the parser to move to the next token in the input stream. In some situations, a resolver 400 function may wish to call it's own lexical analyzer prior to calling the standard one, as for example, when processing a programming language where the majority of tokens appearing in the input stream will be symbol table references. By calling it's own analyzer first and only calling this function if it fails to recognize a token, a resolver 400 can save a considerable amount of time on extremely large input files.

PS_GetLineCount( ). This function returns the current line count for the parse. It is only meaningful from within the parse itself (i.e., in a plug-in or a resolver 400 function).

PS_GetStackDepth( ). This function returns the current depth of the parsing evaluation stack. This may be useful in cases where you do not want to pay strict attention to the popping of the stack during a parse, but wish to ensure that it does not overflow by restoring it to a prior depth (by successive PS_Pop( )'s) from a plug-in at some convenient synchronizing grammatical construct.

PS_SetOptions( ), PS_ClrOptions( ), PS_GetOptions( ). The function PS_SetOptions( ) may be used to modify the options for a parse DB (possibly while it is in progress). One application of such a function is to turn on full parse tracing (from within a plug-in or resolver 400) when the line count reaches a line at which you know the parse will fail. PS_ClrOptions performs the converse operation, that is, it clears the parsing options bits specified. The function PS_GetOptions( ) returns the current options settings.

PS_FlagError( ). In addition to invoking an underlying error logging facility if something goes wrong in a plug-in or resolver 400, this routine can be called to force the parser to abort. If this routine is not called, the parse will continue (which may be appropriate if the erroneous condition has been repaired).

PS_ForceReStart( ). This function causes the parse to re-start the parse from scratch. It is normally used when plug-ins or resolver 400 s have altered the source text as a result of the parsing process, and wish the parser to re-scan in order to force a new behavior. This function does not alter the current lexical analyzer position (i.e., it continues from where it left off. If you wish to do this also you must call PS_SetTokenState( ).

PS_StackType( ) This function gets the contents type of a parser stack element and return the stack element type. PS_GetOpCount( ) gets the number of operands that apply to the specified stack element which should be a plug-in reverse polish operator, it returns the number of operands passed to the plug-in or −1 if no operand list is found. PS GetValue( ) gets the current value of a parser stack element and returns a pointer to the token string, or NULL if not available.

PS_SetElemFlags( ), PS_ClrElemFlags( ), PS_GetElemFlags( ). The first two routines set or clear flag bits in the stack element flag word. PS_GetElemFlags( ) returns the whole flags word. These flags may be used by resolver 400 s and plug-ins to maintain state information associated with elements on the evaluation stack 215.

PS_SetiValue( ), PS_SetfValue( ), PS_SetpValue( ), PS_SetsValue( ). These routines set the current value and type of a parser stack element to the value supplied where:

PS_SetiValue( )—sets the element to a 64 bit integer

PS_SetfValue( )—sets the element to a double

PS_SetpValue( )—sets the element to a pointer value

PS_SetsValue( )—sets the element to a symbol number

PS_GetToken( ). Gets the original token string for a parsing stack element. If the stack element no longer corresponds to an original token (e.g., it is the result of evaluating an expression) then this routine will return NULL, otherwise it will return the pointer to the token string.

PS_AssignIdent( ). This routine invokes the registered identifier resolver 400 to assign a value of the specified type to that identifier; it is normally called by plug-ins in the course of their operation.

PS_EvalIdent( ). This routine invokes the registered identifier resolver 400 to evaluate the specified identifier, and assign the resulting value to the corresponding parser stack element (replacing the original identifier record); it is normally called by plug-ins in the course of their operation. Unlike all other assignments to parser stack elements, the assignment performed by the resolver 400 when called from this routine does not destroy the original value of the token string that is still available for use in other plug-in calls. If a resolver 400 wishes to preserve some kind of token number in the record, it should do so in the tag field that is preserved under most conditions.

PS_SetResolver 400( ),PS SetPlugIn( ). These two functions allow the registration of custom resolver 400 and plug-in functions as described above. Note that when calling a plug-in, the value of the ‘pluginHint’ will be whatever string followed the plug-in specifier in the BNF language syntax (e.g., <@1:2:Arbitrary string>). If this optional string parameter is not specified OR if the ‘kPreserveBNFsymbols’ option is not specified when creating the parser, ‘pluginHint’ will be NULL. This capability is very useful when a single plug-in variant is to be used for multiple purposes each distinguished by the value of ‘pluginHint’ from the BNF. One special and very powerful form of this that will be explored in later patents is for the ‘pluginHint’ text to be the source for interpretation by an embedded parser, that is executed by the plug-in itself.

PS_SetLineFinder( ). Set the line-finder function for a given parser database. Line-finder functions are only required when a language may contain embedded end-of-line characters in string or character constants, otherwise the default line-finder algorithm is sufficient.

PS_SetContextID( ),PS_GetContextID( ). The set function may be called just once for a given parser database and sets the value for the ‘aContextID’ parameter that will be passed to all subsequent resolver 400 and plug-in calls, and which is returned by the function PS_GetContextID( ). The context ID value may be used by the parser application for whatever purpose it requires, it effectively serves as a global common to all calls related to a particular instance of the parser. Obviously an application may chose to use this value as a pointer to additional storage.

PS_AbortParse( ). This function can be called from a resolver 400 or plug-in to abort a parse that is in progress.

PS_GetSourceContext( ). This function can be used to obtain the original source string base address as well as the offset within that string corresponding to the current token pointer. This capability may be useful in cases where parser 205 recognizers or plug-ins need to see multiple lines of source text in order to operate.

PS_GetTokenState( ), PS_SetTokenState( ). These routines are provided to allow a resolver 400 function to alter the sequence of tokens appearing at the input stream of the parser 205. This technique is very powerful in that it allows the grammar to be extended in arbitrary and non-context-free ways. Callers to these functions should make sure that they set all the three token descriptor fields to the correct value to accomplish the behavior they require. Note also that if resolver 400 functions are going to actually edit the input text (via the token pointer) they should be sure that the source string passed to PS_Parse( ) 205 is not pointing to a constant string but is actually in a handle for which source modification is permissible. The judicious use of token modification in this manner is key to the present invention's ability to extend the language set that can be handled far beyond LL(1).

PS_SetFlags( ), PS_ClrFlags( ), PS_GetFlags( ). Set or clear flag bits in the parsers flag word. PS_GetFlags( ) returns the whole flags word. These flags may be used by resolver 400 s and plug-ins to maintain state information.

PS_GetIntegerStackValue( ), PS_GetRealStackValue( ). These functions obtain an integer or real value from the parse evaluation stack 215.

PS_Sprintf( ). This function implements a standard C library sprintf( ) capability within a parser 205 for use by embedded languages where the arguments to PS_Sprintf( ) are obtained from the parser evaluation stack 215. This function is simply provided as a convenience for implementing this common feature.

PS_Parse( ). This function parses an input string according to the grammar provided, as set forth above. Sample code illustrating one embodiment of this function is also provided in Appendix A.

The foregoing description of the preferred embodiments of the invention has been presented for the purposes of illustration and description. For example, the term “parser” throughout this description is addressed as it is currently used in the computer arts related to compiling. This term should not be narrowly construed to only apply to compilers or related technology, however, as the method and system could be used to enhance any sort of data management system. The descriptions of the header structures should also not be limited to the embodiments described. While the sample code provides examples of the code that may be used, the plurality of implementations that could in fact be developed is nearly limitless. For these reasons, this description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teaching. It is intended that the scope of the invention be limited not by this detailed description, but rather by the claims appended hereto.

APPENDIX 4 A SYSTEM FOR EXCHANGING BINARY DATA Inventor: John Fairweather BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

In most modern computer environments, such as programming languages, and applications, the programming language compiler itself performs the job of defining data structures and the types and the fields that make them up. That type information is compile-time determined. This approach has the advantage of allowing the compiler itself to detect many common programmer errors in accessing compound data structures rather than allowing such errors to occur at run-time where they are much harder to find. However, this approach is completely inadequate to the needs of a distributed and evolving system since it is impossible to ensure that the code for all nodes on the system has been compiled with a compatible set of type definitions and will therefore operate correctly. The problem is aggravated when systems from different vendors wish to exchange data and information since their type definitions are bound to be different and thus the compiler can give no help in the exchange. In recent years, technologies such as B2B suites and XML have emerged to try to facilitate the exchange of information between disparate knowledge representation systems by use of common tags, which may be used by the receiving end to identify the content of specific fields. If the receiving system does not understand the tag involved, the corresponding data may be discarded. These systems simply address the problem of converting from one ‘normalized’ representation to another, (i.e., how do I get it from my relational database into yours?) by use of a tagged, textual, intermediate form (e.g. XML). Such text-based markup-language approaches, while they work well for simple data objects, have major shortcomings when it comes to the interchange of complex multimedia and non-flat (i.e., having multiple cross-referenced allocations) binary data. Despite the ‘buzz’ associated with the latest data-interchange techniques, such systems and approaches are totally inadequate for addressing the kinds of problems faced by a system, such as an intelligence system, which attempt to monitor and capture ever-changing streams of unstructured or semi-structured inputs, from the outside world and derive knowledge, computability, and understanding from the data so gathered. The conversion of information, especially complex and multimedia information to/from a textual form such as XML becomes an unacceptable burden on complex information systems and is inadequate for describing many complex data interrelationships. This approach is the current state of the art. At a minimum, what is needed is an interchange language designed to describe and manipulate typed binary data at run-time. Ideally, this type information will be held in a ‘flat’ (i.e., easily transmitted) form and ideally is capable of being embedded in the data itself without impact on data integrity. The system would also ideally make use of the power of compiled strongly typed programming languages (such as C) to define arbitrarily interrelated and complex structures, while preserving the ability to use this descriptive power at run-time to interpret and create new types.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

The present invention provides a strongly-typed, distributed, run-time system capable of describing and manipulating arbitrarily complex, non-flat, binary data derived from type descriptions in a standard (or slightly extended) programming language, including handling of type inheritance. The invention comprises four main components. First, a plurality of databases having binary type and field descriptions. The flat data-model technology (hereinafter “Claimed Database”) described in Appendix 1 is the preferred model for storing such information because it is capable of providing a ‘flat’ (i.e., single memory allocation) representation of an inherently complex and hierarchical (i.e., including type inheritance) type and field set. Second, a run-time modifiable type compiler that is capable of generating type databases either via explicit API calls or by compilation of unmodified header files or individual type definitions in a standard programming language. This function is preferably provided by the parsing technology disclosed in Appendix 2 (hereinafter “Claimed Parser”). Third, a complete API suite for access to type information as well as full support for reading and writing types, type relationships and inheritance, and type fields, given knowledge of the unique numeric type ID and the field name/path. A sample API suite is provided below. Finally, a hashing process for converting type names to unique type IDs (which may also incorporate a number of logical flags relating to the nature of the type). A sample hashing scheme is further described below.

The system of the present invention is a pre-requisite for efficient, flexible, and adaptive distributed information systems.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 provides a sample implementation of the data structure ET_Field;

FIG. 2 provides a sample code implementation of the data structure ET_Type;

FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a sample type definition tree relating ET_Type and ET_Field data structures; and

FIG. 4 provides a sample embodiment of the logical flags that may be used to describe the typeID.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The following description provides an overview of one embodiment of the invention. Please refer to the patent application incorporated herein for a more complete understanding of the Claimed Parser and Claimed Database.

All type information can be encoded by using just two structure variants, these are the ‘ET_Field’ structure, which is used to describe the fields of a given type, and the ‘ET_Type’ structure, which is used to described the type itself. Referring now to FIG. 1, a sample implementation of the ET_Field structure 100 is provided. The fields in the ET_Field structure are defined and used as follows:

-   -   “hdr” 102—This is a standard header record of type ET_Hdr as         defined in the Claimed Database patent application.     -   “typeID” 104—This field, and the union that surrounds it,         contain a unique 64-bit type ID that will be utilized to rapidly         identify the type of any data item. The method for computing         this type ID is discussed in detail below.     -   “fName” 106—This field contains a relative reference to an         ET_String structure specifying the name of the field.     -   “fDesc” 108—This field may contain a relative reference to an         ET_String structure containing any descriptive text associated         with the field (for example the contents of the line comments in         the type definitions above).     -   “fieldLink” 110—This field contains a relative reference to the         next field of the current type. Fields are thus organized into a         link list that starts from the “fieldHDR” 220 field 220 of the         type and passes through successive “fieldLink” 110 links 110         until there are no more fields.     -   “offset” 112—This field contains the byte offset from the start         of the parent type at which the field starts. This offset         provides rapid access to field values at run-time.     -   “unitID” 114—This field contains the unique unit ID of the         field. Many fields have units (e.g., miles-per-hour) and         knowledge of the units for a given field is essential when using         or comparing field values.     -   “bounds” 116—For fields having array bounds (e.g., and array of         char[80]), this field contains the first array dimension.     -   “bounds2” 118—For two dimensional arrays, this field contains         the second dimension. This invention is particularly         well-adapted for structures of a higher dimensionality than two,         or where the connections between elements of a structure is more         complex that simple array indexing.     -   “fScript” 120—Arbitrary and pre-defined actions, functions, and         scripts may be associated with any field of a type. These         ‘scripts’ are held in a formatted character string referenced         via a relative reference from this field.     -   “fAnnotation” 122—In a manner similar to scripts, the text field         referenced from this field can contain arbitrary annotations         associated with the field. The use of these annotations will be         discussed in later patents.     -   “flagIndex” 124—It is often convenient to refer to a field via a         single number rather than carrying around the field name. The         field index is basically a count of the field occurrence index         within the parent type and serves this purpose.     -   “fEchoField” 126—This field is associated with forms of         reference that are not relevant to this patent and is not         discussed herein.     -   “flagIndexTypeID” 128—In cases where a field is embedded within         multiple enclosing parent types, the ‘flagIndex’ value stored in         the field must be tagged in this manner to identify which         ancestral enclosing type the index refers to.

Referring now to FIG. 2, a sample embodiment of the ET_Type structure 200 is provided. The fields of the ET_Type structure 200 are defined and used as follows:

-   -   “hdr” 202—This is a standard header record of type ET_Hdr as         defined in the Claimed Database patent application.     -   “typeID” 204—This field, and the union that surrounds it,         contain a unique 64-bit type ID that will be utilized to rapidly         identify the type of any data item. The method for computing         this type ID is discussed in detail below.     -   “name” 206—This is a relative reference to a string giving the         name of the type.     -   “edit”,“display.” 208—These are relative references to strings         identifying the “process” to be used to display/edit this type         (if other than the default). For example the specialized process         to display/edit a color might be a color-wheel dialog rather         than a simple dialog allowing entry of the fields of a color         (red, green, blue).     -   “description” 210—This is a relative reference to a string         describing the type.     -   “ChildLink” 212—For an ancestral type from which descendant         types inherit, this field gives the relative reference to the         next descendant type derived from the same ancestor. Type         hierarchies are defined by creating trees of derived types. The         header to the list of child types at any level is the “childHdr”         field 218, the link between child types is the “ChildLink” field         212. Because types are organized into multiple type databases         (as discussed later), there are two forms of such links: the         local form and non-local form. The non-local form is mediated by         type ID references, not relative references (as for the local         form), and involves the fields “childIDLink” 236, “childIDHdr”         238, and “parentID” 240 (which hold the reference from the child         type to its parent). The parent reference for the local form is         held in the “parent” field of “hdr” 202.     -   “cTypedef” 216—This field may optionally contain a relative         reference to a string giving the C language type definition from         which the type was created.     -   “childHdr” 218—This field contains the header to the list of         child types at any level.     -   “fieldHDR” 220—Fields are organized into a link list that starts         from the this field.     -   “keywords” 222—This field contains a relative reference to a         string contain key words by which the type can be looked up.     -   “bounds” 224, “bounds2” 226—array dimensions as for ET_Field     -   “size” 228—Total size of the type in bytes.     -   “color” 230—To facilitate type identification in various         situations, types may be assigned inheritable colors.     -   “fileIndex” 232—used to identify the source file from which the         type was created.     -   “keyTypeID” 234—This field is used to indicate whether this type         is designated a “key” type. In a full data-flow based system,         certain types are designated ‘key’ types and may have servers         associated with them.     -   “nextKeyType” 246—This field is used to link key types into a         list.     -   “tScript” 242,“tAnnotation” 244—These fields reference type         scripts and annotations as for ET_Field 100.     -   “maxFieldIndex” 248—This field contains the maximum field index         value (see ET_Field 100) contained within the current type.     -   “numFields” 250—This gives the total number of fields within the         current type.

To illustrate the application of these structures 100, 200 to the respresentation of types and the fields within them, consider the type definitions below whereby the types “Cat” and “Dog” are both descendant from the higher level type “Mammal” (denoted by the “::” symbol similar to C++ syntax). typedef struct Mammal {  RGBColor hairColor;  int32 gestation; // in days } Mammal; typedef struct Dog::Mammal {  int32 barkVol; // in decibels } Dog; typedef struct Cat::Mammal {  int32 purrVol; // in decibels } Cat;

Because they are mammals, both Cat and Dog inherit the fields “hairColor” and “gestationPeriod” which means the additional field(s) defined for each start immediately after the total of all inherited fields (from each successive ancestor). Referring now to FIG. 3, this portion of the type definition tree when viewed as a tree of related ET_Type 200 and ET_Field 100 structures is shown. In this diagram, the vertical lines 305 linking the types 315, 320 are mediated via the “childHdr” 218 and “parent” 240 links. The horizontal line 310 linking Dog 320 and Cat 325 is mediated via “ChildLink” 242. Similarly for the field links 330, 335, 340, 345 within any given type, the fields involved are “parentID” 240, “fieldHDR” 220, and “fieldLink” 110. It is thus very obvious how one would navigate through the hierarchy in order to discover say all the fields of a given type. For example, the following sample pseudo code illustrates use of recursion to first process all inherited fields before processing those unique to the type itself. void LoopOverFields (ET_Type *aType) {  if ( aType->hdr.parent )   LoopOverFields(aType->hdr.parent)  for ( fieldPtr = aType->fieldHdr ; fieldPtr ; fieldPtr =  fieldPtr->fieldLink )   -- do something with the field }

Given this simple tree structure in which type information is stored and accessed, it should be clear to any capable software engineer how to implement the algorithms setr forth in the Applications Programming Interface (API) given below. This API illustrates the nature and scope of one set of routines that provide full control over the run-time type system of this invention. This API is intended to be illustrative of the types of capabilities provided by the system of this invention and is not intended to be exhaustive. Sample code implementing the following defined API is provided in the attached Appendix A.

The routine TM_CruiseTypeHierarchy( ) recursively iterates through all the subtypes contained in a root type, call out to the provided callback for each type in the hierarchy. In the preferred embodiment, if the function ‘callbackFunc’ returns −1, this routine omits calling for any of that types sub-types.

The routine TM_Code2TypeDB( ) takes a type DB code (or TypeID value) and converts it to a handle to the types database to which it corresponds (if any). The type system of this invention allows for multiple related type databases (as described below) and this routine determines which database a given type is defined in.

TM_InitATypeDB( ) and TM_TermATypeDB( ) initialize and terminate a types database respectively. Each type DB is simply a single memory allocation utilizing a ‘flat’ memory model (such as the system disclosed in the Claimed Database patent application) containing primarily records of ET_Type 100 and ET_Field 200 defining a set of types and their inter-relationships.

TM_SaveATypeDB( ) saves a types database to a file from which it can be re-loaded for later use.

TM_AlignedCopy( ) copies data from a packed structure in which no alignment rules are applied to a normal output structure of the same type for which the alignment rules do apply. These non-aligned structures may occur when reading from files using the type manager. Different machine architectures and compilers pack data into structures with different rules regarding the ‘padding’ inserted between fields. As a result, these data structures may not align on convenient boundaries for the underlying processor. For this reason, this function is used to handle these differences when passing data between dissimilar machine architecture.

TM_FixByteOrdering( ) corrects the byte ordering of a given type from the byte ordering of a ‘source’ machine to that of a ‘target’ machine (normally 0 for the current machine architecture). This capability is often necessary when reading or writing data from/to files originating from another computer system. Common byte orderings supported are as follows:

kBigEndian—e.g., the Macintosh PowerPC

kLittleEndian—e.g., the Intel x86 architecture

kCurrentByteOrdering—current machine architecture

TM_FindTypeDB( ) can be used to find the TypeDB handle that contains the definition of the type name specified (if any). There are multiple type DBs in the system which are accessed such that user typeDBs are consulted first, followed by system type DBs. The type DBs are accessed in the reverse order to that in which they were defined. This means that it is possible to override the definition of an existing type by defining a new one in a later types DB. Normally the containing typeDB can be deduced from the type ID alone (which contains an embedded DB index), however, in cases where only the name is known, this function deduces the corresponding DB. This routine returns the handle to containing type DB or NULL if not found. This invention allows for a number of distinct type DBs to co-exist so that types coming from different sources or relating to different functional areas may be self contained. In the preferred embodiment, these type DBs are identified by the letters of the alphabet (‘A’ to ‘Z’) yielding a maximum of 26 fixed type databases. In addition, temporary type databases (any number) can be defined and accessed from within a given process context and used to hold local or temporary types that are unique to that context. All type DBs are connected together via a linked list and types from any later database may reference or derive from types in an earlier database (the converse is not true). Certain of these type DBs may be pre-defined to have specialized meanings. A preferred list of type DBs that have specialized meanings as follows:

‘A’—built-in types and platform Toolbox header files

‘B’—GUI framework and environment header files

‘C’—Project specific header files

‘D’—Flat data-model structure old-versions DB (allows automatic adaption to type changes)

‘E’—Reserved for ‘proxy’ types

‘F’—Reserved for internal dynamic use by the environment

‘I’—Project specific ontology types

TM_GetTypeID( ) retrieves a type's ID Number when given its name. If aTypeName is valid, the type ID is returned, otherwise 0 is returned and an error is reported.

TM_IsKnownTypeName( ) is almost identical but does not report an error if the specified type name cannot be found.

TM_ComputeTypeBaseID( ) computes the 32-bit unique type base ID for a given type name, returning it in the most significant 32-bit word of a 64-bit ET_TypeID 104. The base ID is calculated by hashing the type name and should thus be unique to all practical purposes. The full typeID is a 64-bit quantity where the base ID as calculated by this routine forms the most significant 32 bits while a variety of logical flags describing the type occupy the least significant 32-bits. In order to ensure that there is a minimal probability of two different names mapping onto the same type ID, the hash function chosen in the preferred embodiment is the 32-bit CRC used as the frame check sequence in ADCCP (ANSI X3.66, also known as FIPS PUB 71 and FED-STD-1003, the U.S. versions of CCITT's X.25 link-level protocol) but with the bit order reversed. The FIPS PUB 78 states that the 32-bit FCS reduces hash collisions by a factor of 10ˆ-5 over the 16-bit FCS. Any other suitable hashing scheme, however, could be used. The approach allows type names to be rapidly and uniquely converted to the corresponding type ID by the system. This is an important feature if type information is to be reliably shared across a network by different machines. The key point is that by knowledge of the type name alone, a unique numeric type ID can be formed which can then be efficiently used to access information about the type, its fields, and its ancestry. The other 32 bits of a complete 64-bit type ID are utilized to contain logical flags concerning the exact nature of the type and are provided in Appendix A.

Given these type flag definitions and knowledge of the hashing algorithm involved, it is possible to define constants for the various built-in types (i.e., those directly supported by the underlying platform from which all other compound types can be defined by accumulation). A sample list of constants for the various built in types is provided in Appendix A.

Assuming that the constant definitions set forth in Appendix A are used, it is clear that the very top of the type hierarchy, the built-in types (from which all other types eventually derive), are similar to that exposed by the C language.

Referring now to FIG. 4, a diagrammatic representation of a built-in type is shown (where indentation implies a descendant type). Within the kUniversalType 405, the set of direct descendants includes kVoidType 410, kScalarType 415, kStructType 420, kUnionType 425, and kFunctionType 430. kScalarType also includes descendants for handling integers 435, descendants for handling real numbers 440 and descendants for handling special case scalar values 445. Again, this illustrates only one embodiment of built-in types that may be utilized by the present system.

The following description provides a detailed summary of some of the functions that may be used in conjunction with the present invention. This list is not meant to be exhaustive nor or many of these functions required (depending upon the functionality required for a given implementation). The pseudo code associated with these functions is further illustrated in attached Appendix A. It will be obvious to those skilled in the art how these functions could be implemented in code.

Returning now to Appendix A, a function TM_CleanFieldName( ) is defined which provides a standardized way of converting field names within a type into human readable labels that can be displayed in a UI. By choosing suitable field names for types, the system can create “human readable” labels in the corresponding UI. The conversion algorithm can be implemented as follows:

-   -   1) Convert underscores to spaces, capitalizing any letter that         immediately follows the underscore     -   2) Capitalize the first letter     -   3) Insert a space in front of every capitalized letter that         immediately follows a lower case letter     -   4) Capitalize any letter that immediately follows a ‘.’         character (field path delimiter)     -   5) De-capitalize the first letter of any of the following filler         words (unless they start the sentence):         -   “an”, “and”, “of”, “the”, “or”, “to”, “is”, “as”, “a”     -   So for example:         -   “aFieldName” would become “A Field Name” as would             “a_field_name”         -   “timeOfDay” would become “Time of Day” as would             “time_of_day”

A function, such as TM_AbbreveFieldName( ), could be used to provide a standardized way of converting field names within a type into abbreviated forms that are still (mostly) recognizable. Again, choosing suitable field names for types ensures both human readable labels in the corresponding UI as well as readable abbreviations for other purposes (such as generating database table names in an external relational database system). The conversion algorithm is as follows:

1) The first letter is copied over and capitalized.

2) For all subsequent letters:

-   -   a) If the letter is a capital, copy it over and any         ‘numLowerCase’ lower case letters that immediately follow it.     -   b) If the letter follows a space or an underscore, copy it over         and capitalize it     -   c) If the letter is ‘.’, ‘[’, or ‘]’, convert it (and any         immediately subsequent letters in this set) to a single ‘_’         character, capitalize the next letter (if any). This behavior         allows this function to handle field paths.     -   d) otherwise disgard it

So for example:

-   -   “aFieldName” would become “AFiNa” as would “a_field_name” if         ‘numLowerCase’ was 1, it would be ‘AFieNam’ if it were 2     -   “timeOfDay” would become “TiOfDa” as would “time of day” if         ‘numLowerCase’ was 1, it would be ‘TimOfDay’ if it were 2

For a field path example:

-   -   “geog.city[3].population” would become “Ge_Ci_(—)3_Po” if         ‘numLowerCase’ was 1

Wrapper functions, such as TM_SetTypeEdit( ), TM_SetTypeDisplay( ), TM_SetTypeConverter( ), TM_SetTypeCtypedef( ), TM_SetTypeKeyWords( ), TM_SetTypeDescription( ), and TM_SetTypeColor( ), may be used set the corresponding field of the ET_Type structure 200. The corresponding ‘get’ functions are simply wrapper functions to get the same field.

A function, TM_SetTypeIcon( ), may be provided that sets the color icon ID associated with the type (if specified). It is often useful for UI purposes to associate an identifiable icon with particular types (e.g., a type of occupation), this icon can be specified using TM_SetTypeIcon( ) or as part of the normal acquisition process. Auto-generated UI (and many other UI context) may use such icons to aid in UI clarity. Icons can also be inherited from ancestral types so that it is only necessary to specify an icon if the derived type has a sufficiently different meaning semantically in a UI context. The function TM_GetTypeIcon( ) returns the icons associated with a type (if any).

A function, such as TM_SetTypeKeyType( ), may be used to associate a key data type (see TM_GetTypeKeyType) with a type manager type. By making this association, it is possible to utilize the full suite of behaviors supported for external APIs such as Database and Client-Server APIs, including creation and communication with server(s) of that type, symbolic invocation, etc. For integration with external APIs, another routine, such as TM_KeyTypeToTypeID( ), may be used to obtain the type manager type ID corresponding to a given key data type. If there is no corresponding type ID, this routine returns zero.

Another function, TM_GetTypeName( ), may be used to get a type's name given the type ID number. In the preferred embodiment, this function returns using the ‘aTypeName’ parameter, the name of the type.

A function, such as TM_FindTypesByKeyword( ), may be used to search for all type DBs (available from the context in which it is called) to find types that contain the keywords specified in the ‘aKeywordList’ parameter. If matches are found, the function can allocate and return a handle to an array of type IDs in the ‘theIDList’ parameter and a count of the number of elements in this array as it's result. If the function result is zero, ‘theIDList’ is not allocated.

The function TM_GetTypeFileName( ) gets the name of the header file in which a type was defined (if any).

Given a type ID, a function, such as TM_GetParentTypeID( ), can be used to get the ID of the parent type. If the given ID has no parent, an ID of 0 will be returned. If an error occurrs, a value of −1 will be returned.

Another function, such as TM_IsTypeDescendant( ), may be used to determine if one type is the same as or a descendant of another. The TM_IsTypeDescendant( ) call could be used to check only direct lineage whereas TM_AreTypesCompatible( ) checks lineage and other factors in determining compatibility. If the source is a descendant of, or the same as, the target, TRUE is returned, otherwise FALSE is returned.

Another set of functions, hereinafter referred to as TM_TypeIsPointer( ), TM_TypeIsHandle( ), TM_TypeIsRelRef( ), TM_TypeIsCollectionRef( ), TM_TypeIsPersistentRef( ), may be used to determine if a typeID represents a pointer/handle/relative etc. reference to memory or the memory contents itself (see typeID flag definitions). The routines optionally return the typeID of the base type that is referenced if the type ID does represent a pointer/handle/ref. In the preferred embodiment, when calling TM_TypeIsPtr( ), a type ID that is a handle will return FALSE so the determination of whether the type is a handle, using a function such as TM_TypeIsHandle( ), could be checked first where both possibilities may occur. The function TM_TypeIsReference( ) will return true if the type is any kind of reference. This function could also return the particular reference type via a paramter, such as the ‘refType’ parameter.

Another function, such as TM_TypesAreCompatible( ), may be used to check if the source type is the same as, or a descendant of, the target type. In the preferred embodiment, this routine returns:

-   -   +1 If the source type is a descendant of the target type (a         legal connection)     -   −1 If the source type is a group type (no size) and the target         is descended from it (also a legal connection)     -   0 Otherwise (an illegal connection)

If the source type is a ‘grouping’ type (e.g., Scalar), i.e., it has no size then this routine will return compatible if either the source is ancestral to the target or vice-versa. This allows for data flow connections that are typed using a group to be connected to flows that are more restricted.

Additional functions, such as TM_GetTypeSize( ) and TM_SizeOf( ), could be applied in order to return the size of the specified data type. For example, TM_GetTypeSize( ) could be provided with an optional data handle which may be used to determine the size of variable sized types (e.g., strings). Either the size of the type could be returned or, alternatively, a 0 could be returned for an error. TM_SizeOf( ) could be provided with a similar optional data pointer. It also could return the size of the type or 0 for an error.

A function, such as TM_GetTypeBounds( ), could be programmed to return the array bounds of an array type. If the type is not an array type, this function could return a FALSE indicator instead.

The function TM_GetArrayTypeElementOffset( ) can be used to access the individual elements of an array type. Note that this is distinct from accessing the elements an array field. If a type is an array type, the parent type is the type of the element of that array. This knowledge can be used to allow assignment or access to the array elements through the type manager API.

The function TM_InitMem( ) initializes an existing block of memory for a type. The memory will be set to zero except for any fields which have values which will be initialized to the appropriate default (either via annotation or script calls—not discussed herein). The function TM_NewPtr( ) allocates and initializes a heap data pointer. If you wish to allocate a larger amount of memory than the type would imply, you may specify a non-zero value for the ‘size’ parameter. The value passed should be TM_GetTypeSize( . . . )+the extra memory required. If a type ends in a variable sized array parameter, this will be necessary in order to ensure the correct allocation. The function TM_NewHdl( ) performs a similar function for a heap data handle. The functions TM_DisposePtr( ) and TM_DisposeHdl( ) may be used to de-allocate memory allocated in this manner.

The function TM_LocalFieldPath( ) can be used to truncate a field path to that portion that lies within the specified enclosing type. Normally field paths would inherently satisfy this condition, however, there are situations where a field path implicitly follows a reference. This path truncation behavior is performed internally for most field related calls. This function should be used prior to such calls if the possibility of a non-local field path exists in order to avoid confusion. For example: typedef struct t1 {  char x[16]; } t1; typedef struct t2 {  t1 y; } t2; then TM_LocalFieldPath(,t2,“y.x[3]”,) would yield the string “y”.

Given a type ID, and a field within that type, TM_GetFieldTypeID( ) will return the type ID of the aforementioned field or 0 in the case of an error.

The function TM_GetBuiltInAncestor( ) returns the first built-in direct (i.e., not via a reference) ancestor of the type ID given.

Two functions, hereinafter called TM_GetIntegerValue( ) and TM_GetRealValue( ), could be used to obtain integer and real values in a standardized form. In the preferred embodiment, if the specified type is, or can be converted to, an integer value, the TM_GetIntegerValue( ) would return that value as the largest integer type (i.e., int64). If the specified type is, or can be converted to, a real value, TM_GetRealValue( ) would return that value the largest real type (i.e., long double). This is useful when code does not want to be concerned with the actual integer or real variant used by the type or field. Additional functions, such as TM_SetIntegerValue( ) and TM_SetRealValue( ), could perform the same function in the opposite direction.

Given a type ID, and a field within that type, a function, hereinafter called TM_GetFieldContainerTypeID( ), could be used to return the container type ID of the aforementioned field or 0 in the case of an error. Normally the container type ID of a field is identical to ‘aTypeID’, however, in the case where a type inherits fields from other ancestral types, the field specified may actually be contributed by one of those ancestors and in this case, the type ID returned will be some ancestor of ‘aTypeID’. In the preferred embodiment, if a field path is specified via ‘aFieldName’ (e.g., field1.field2) then the container type ID returned would correspond to the immediate ancestor of ‘field2’, that is ‘field1’. Often these inner structures are anonymous types that the type manager creates during the types acquisition process.

A function, hereinafter called TM_GetFieldSize( ), returns the size, in bytes, of a field, given the field name and the field's enclosing type; 0 is returned if unsuccessful.

A function, hereinafter called TM_IsLegalFieldPath( ), determines if a string could be a legal field path, i.e., does not contain any characters that could not be part of a field path. This check does not mean that the path actually is valid for a given type, simply that it could be. This function operates by rejecting any string that contains characters that are not either alphanumeric or in the set ‘[’, ‘]’, ‘_’, or ‘.’. Spaces are allowed only between ‘[’ and ‘]’.

Given an enclosing type ID, a field name, and a handle to the data, a function, hereinafter known as TM_GetFieldValueH( ), could be used to copy the field data referenced by the handle into a new handle. In the preferred embodiment, it will return the handle storing the copy of the field data. If the field is an array of ‘char’, this call would append a terminating null byte. That is if a field is “char[4]” then at least a 5 byte buffer must be allocated in order to hold the result. This approach greatly simplifies C string handling since returned strings are guaranteed to be properly terminated. A function, such as TM_GetFieldValueP( ), could serve as the pointer based equivalent. Additionally, a function such as TM_SetFieldValue( ) could be used to set a field value given a type ID, a field name and a binary object. It would also return an error code in an error.

A function, such as TM_SetCStringFieldValue( ), could be used to set the C string field of a field within the specified type. This function could transparently handle logic for the various allowable C-string fields as follows:

1) if the field is a charHdl then:

-   -   a) if the field already contains a value, update/grow the         existing handle to hold the new value     -   b) otherwise allocate a handle and assign it to the field

2) if the field is a charPtr then:

-   -   a) if the field already contains a value:         -   i) if the previous string is equal to or longer than the new             one, copy new string into existing pointer         -   ii) otherwise dispose of previous pointer, allocate a new             one and assign it     -   b) otherwise allocate a pointer and assign it to the field

3) if the field is a relative reference then:

-   -   a) this should be considered an error. A pointer value could be         assigned to such a field prior to moving the data into a         collection in which case you should use a function similar to         the TM_SetFieldValue( ) function described above.

4) if the field is an array of char then:

-   -   a) if the new value does not fit, report array bounds error     -   b) otherwise copy the value into the array

A function, such as TM_AssignToField( ), could be used to assign a simple field to a value expressed as a C string. For example, the target field could be:

a) Any form of string field or string reference;

b) A persistent or collection reference to another type; or

c) Any other direct simple or structure field type. In this case the format of the C string given should be compatible with a call to TM_StringToBinary( ) (described above) for the field type involved. The delimiter for TM_StringToBinary( ) is taken to be “,” and the ‘kCharArrayAsString’ option (see TM_BinaryToString) is assumed.

In the preferred embodiment, the assignment logic used by this routine (when the ‘kAppendStringValue’ is present) would result in existing string fields having new values appended to the end of them rather than being overwritten. This is in contrast to the behavior of TM_SetCStringFieldValue( ) described above. For non-string fields, any values specified overwrite the previous field content with the exception of assignment to the ‘aStringH’ field of a collection or persistent reference with is appended if the ‘kAppendStringValue’ option is present. If the field being assigned is a collection reference and the ‘kAppendStringValue’ option is set, the contents of ‘aStringPtr’ could be appended to the contents of a string field. If the field being assigned is a persistent reference, the

‘kAssignToRefType’,‘ kAssignToUniqueID’ or ‘kAssignToStringH’ would be used to determine if the typeID, unique ID, or ‘aStringH’ field of the reference is assigned. Otherwise the assignment is to the name field. In the case of ‘kAssignToRefType’, the string could be assumed to be a valid type name which is first converted to a type ID. If the field is a relative reference (assumed to be to a string), the contents of ‘aStringPtr’ could be assigned to it as a (internally allocated) heap pointer.

Given an enclosing type ID, a field name, and a pointer to the data, a function such as TM_SetArrFieldValue( ) could be used to copy the data referenced by the pointer into an element of an array field element into the buffer supplied. Array fields may have one, or two dimensions.

Functions, hereinafter named TM_GetCStringFieldValueB( ), TM_GetCStringFieldValueP( ) and TM_GetCStringFieldValueH( ), could be used to get a C string field from a type into a buffer/pointer/handle. In the case of a buffer, the buffer supplied must be large enough to contain the field contents returned. In other cases the function or program making the call must dispose of the memory returned when no longer required. In the preferred embodiment, this function will return any string field contents regardless of how is actually stored in the type structure, that is the field value may be in an array, via a pointer, or via a handle, it will be returned in the memory supplied. If the field type is not appropriate for a C string, this function could optionally return FALSE and provide an empty output buffer.

Given an enclosing type ID, a field name, and a pointer to the data, the system should also include a function, hereinafter name TM_GetArrFieldValueP( ), that will copy an element of an array field element's data referenced by the pointer into the buffer supplied. Array fields may have one, or two dimensions.

Simple wrapper functions, hereinafter named TM_GetFieldBounds( ), TM_GetFieldOffset( ), TM_GetFieldUnits( ), and TM_GetFieldDescription( ), could be provided in order to access the corresponding field in ET_Field 100. Corresponding ‘set’ functions (which are similar) could also be provided.

The function TM_ForAllFieldsLoop( ) is also provided that will iterate through all fields (and sub-fields) of a type invoking the specified procedure. This behavior is commonplace in a number of situations involving scanning the fields of a type. In the preferred embodiment, the scanning process should adhere to a common approach and as a result a function, such as this one, should be used for that purpose. A field action function takes the following form: Boolean myActionFn ( // my field action function   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I: Type DB (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID 104 aTypeID, // I: The type ID   ET_TypeID 104 aContainingTypeID, // I: containing Type ID of field   anonPtr aDataPtr, // I: The type data pointer   anonPtr context, // IO:Use to pass custom context   charPtr fieldPath, // I:Field path for field   ET_TypeID 104 aFieldTypeID // I:Type ID for field   int32 dimension1, // I:Field array bounds 1 (0 if N/A)   int32 dimension2, // I:Field array bounds 2 (0 if N/A)   int32 fieldOffset, // I:Offset of start of field   int32 options, // I:Options flags   anonPtr internalUseOnly // I:For internal use only ) // R:TRUE for success

In this example, fields are processed in the order they occur, sub-field calls (if appropriate) occur after the containing field call. If this function encounters an array field (1 or 2 dimensional), it behaves as follows:

-   -   a) The action function is first called once for the entire field         with no field indexing specified in the path.     -   b) If the element type of the array is a structure (not a         union), the action function will be invoked recursively for each         element with the appropriate element index(es) reflected in the         ‘fieldPath’ parameter, the appropriate element specific value in         ‘fieldOffset’, and 0 for both dimension1 and dimension2.

This choice of behavior for array fields offers the simplest functional interface to the action function. Options are:

-   -   kRecursiveLoop—If set, recurses through sub-fields, otherwise         one-level only     -   kDataPtrIsViewRef—The ‘aDataPtr’ is the address of an ET_ViewRef         designating a collection element

A function, hereinafter referred to as TM_FieldNameExists( ), could be used to determine if a field with the given name is in the given type, or any of the type's ancestral types. If the field is found return it returns TRUE, otherwise it returns FALSE.

A function, hereinafter referred to as TM_GetNumberOfFields( ), may be used to return the number of fields in a given structured type or a −1 in the case of an error. In the preferred embodiment, this number is the number of direct fields within the type, if the type contains sub-structures, the fields of these sub-structures are not counted towards the total returned by this function. One could use another function, such as TM_ForAllFieldsLoop( ), to count fields regardless of level with ‘kRecursiveLoop’ set true and a counting function passed for ‘aFieldFn’ (see TM_GetTypeMaxFlagIndex).

Another function, referred to as TM_GetFieldFlagIndex( ), can provide the ‘flag index’ for a given field within a type. The flag index of a field is defined to be that field's index in the series of calls that are made by the function TM_ForAllFieldsLoop( ) (described above) before it encounters the exact path specified. This index can be utilized as an index into some means of storing information or flags specific to that field within the type. In the preferred embodiment, these indeces include any field or type arrays that may be within the type. This function may also be used internally by a number of collection flag based APIs but may also be used by external code for similar purposes. In the event that TM_ForAllFieldsLoop( ) calls back for the enclosing structure field before it calls back for the fields within this enclosing structure, the index may be somewhat larger than the count of the ‘elementary’ fields within the type. Additionally, because field flag indeces can be easily converted to/from the corresponding field path (see TM_FlagIndexToFieldPath), they may be a useful way of referring to a specific field in a variety of circumstances that would make maintaining the field path more cumbersome. Supporting functions include the following: TM_FieldOffsetToFlagIndex( ) is a function that converts a field offset to the corresponding flag index within a type; TM_FlagIndexToFieldPath( ) is a function that converts a flag index to the corresponding field path within a type; and the function TM_GetTypeMaxFlagIndex( ) returns the maximum possible value that will be returned by TM_GetFieldFlagIndex( ) for a given type. This can be used for example to allocate memory for flag storage.

Another function, referred to as TM_FieldNamesToIndeces( ), converts a comma seperated list of field names/paths to the corresponding zero terminated list of field indeces. It is often the case that the ‘fieldNames’ list references fields within the structure that is actually referenced from a field within the structure identified by ‘aTypeID’. In this case, the index recorded in the index list will be of the referencing field, the remainer of the path is ignored. For this reason, it is possible that duplicate field indeces might be implied by the list of ‘fieldNames’ and as a result, this routine can also be programmed to automatically eliminate duplicates.

A function, hereinafter name TM_GetTypeProxy( ), could be used to obtain a proxy type that can be used within collections in place of the full persistent type record and which contains a limited subset of the fields of the original type. While TM_GetTypeProxy( ) could take a list of field indeces, the function TM_MakeTypeProxyFromFieldsO could be used to take a comma separated field list. Otherwise, both functions would be identical. Proxy types are all descendant of the type ET_Hit and thus the first few fields are identical to those of ET_Hit. By using these fields, it is possible to determine the original persistent value to which the proxy refers. The use of proxys enables large collections and lists to be built up and fetched from servers without the need to fetch all the corresponding data, and without the memory requirements implied by use of the referenced type(s). In the preferred embodiment, proxy types are formed and used dynamically. This approach provides a key advantage of the type system of this invention and is crucial to efficient operation of complex distributed systems. Proxy types are temporary, that is, although they become known throughout the application as soon as they are defined using this function, they exist only for the duration of a given run of the application. Preferably, proxy types are actually created into type database ‘E’ which is reserved for that purpose (see above). Multiple proxys may also be defined for the same type having different index lists. In such a case, if a matching proxy already exists in ‘E’, it is used. A proxy type can also be used in place of the actual type in almost all situations, and can be rapidly resolved to obtain any additional fields of the original type. In one embodiment, proxy type names are of the form:

-   -   typeName_Proxy_n     -   Where the (hex) value of ‘n’ is a computed function of the field         index list.

Another function that may be provided as part of the API, hereinafter called TM_MakeTypeProxyFromFilter( ), can be used to make a proxy type that can be used within collections in place of the full persistent type record and which contains a limited subset of the fields of the original type. Preferably, the fields contained in the proxy are those allowed by the filter function, which examines ALL fields of the full type and returns TRUE to include the field in the proxy or FALSE to exclude the field. For more information concerning proxy types, see the discussion for the function TM_MakeTypeProxyFromFields( ). The only difference between this function and the function TM_MakeTypeProxyFromFields( ) is that TM_MakeTypeProxyFromFields( ) expects a commma separated field list as a parameter instead of a filter function. Another function, TM_IsTypeProxy( ), could be used to determine if a given type is a proxy type and if so, what original persistent type it is a proxy for. Note that proxy type values start with the fields of ET_Hit and so both the unique ID and the type ID being referenced may be obtained more accurately from the value. The type ID returned by this function may be ancestral to the actual type ID contained within the proxy value itself. The type ET_Hit may be used to return data item lists from servers in a form that allows them to be uniquely identified (via the _system and _id fields) so that the full (or proxy) value can be obtained from the server later. ET_Hit is defined as follows: typedef struct ET_Hit // list of query hits returned by a server {  OSType _system; // system tag  unsInt64 _id; // local unique item ID  ET_TypeID 104 _type; // type ID  int32 _relevance; // relevance value 0..100 } ET_Hit;

The function TM_GetNthFieldType( ) gets the type of the Nth field in a structure. TM_GetNthFieldName( ) obtains the corresponding field name and TM_GetNthFieldOffset( ) the corresponding field offset.

Another function that may be included within the API toolset is a function called TM_GetTypeChildren( ). This function produces a list of type IDs of the children of the given type. This function allocates a zero terminated array of ET_TypeID 104's and returns the address of the array in ‘aChildIDList’; the type ID's are written into this array. If ‘aChildIDList’ is specified as NULL then this array is not allocated and the function merely counts the number of children; otherwise ‘aChildIDList’ must be the address of a pointer that will point at the typeID array on exit. A negative number is returned in the case of an error. In the preferred embodiment, various specialized options for omitting certain classes of child types are supported.

A function, hereinafter referred to as TM_GetTypeAncestors( ), may also be provided that produces a list of type IDs of ancestors of the given type. This function allocates a zero terminated array of ET_TypeID 104 and returns the address of the array in ‘ancestralIDs’; the type ID's are written into this array. If ‘ancestralIDs’ is specified as NULL then this array is not allocated and the function merely counts the number of ancestors; otherwise ‘ancestralIDs’ must be the address of a pointer that will point at the typeID array on exit. The last item in the list is a 0, the penultimate item is the primal ancestor of the given type, and the first item in the list is the immediate predecessor, or parent, of the given type. The function TM_GetTypeAncestorPath( ) produces a ‘:’ seperated type path from a given ancestor to a descendant type. The path returned is exclusive of the type name but inclusive of the descendant, empty if the two are the same or ‘ancestorID’ is not an ancestor or ‘aTypeID’. The function TM_GetInheritanceChain( ) is very similiar to TM_GetTypeAncestors( ) with the following exceptions:

-   -   (1) the array of ancestor type ids returned is in reverse order         with the primal ancestor being in element 0     -   (2) the base type from which the list of ancestors is determined         is included in the array and is the next to last element (array         is 0 terminated)     -   (3) the count of the number of ancestors includes the base type

In the preferred embodiment, this function allocates a zero terminated array of ET_TypeID 104's and returns the address of the array in ‘inheritanceChainIDs’; the type ID's are written into this array. If ‘inheritanceChainIDs’ is specified as NULL then this array is not allocated and the function merely counts the number of types in the inheritance chain; otherwise ‘inheritanceChainIDs’ must be the address of a pointer that will point at the typeID array on exit. The last item in the list is 0, element 0 is the primal ancestor of the base type, and the next to last item in the list is the base type.

The API could also include a function, hereinafter called TM_GetTypeDescendants( ), that is able to create a tree collection whose root node is the type specified and whose branch and leaf nodes are the descendant types of the root. Each node in the tree is named by the type name and none of the nodes contain any data. Collections of derived types can serve as useful frameworks onto which various instances of that type can be ‘hung’ or alternatively as a navigation and/or browsing framework. The resultant collection can be walked using the collections API (discussed in a later patent). The function TM_GetTypeSiblings( ) produces a list of type IDs of sibling types of the given type. This function allocates a zero terminated array of ET_TypeID 104's and returns the address of the array in ‘aListOSibs’, the type ID's are written into this array. If ‘aListOSibs’ is specified as NULL then this array is not allocated and the function merely counts the number of siblings; otherwise ‘ancestralIDs’ must be the address of a pointer that will point at the typeID array on exit. The type whose siblings we wish to find is NOT included in the returned list. The function TM_GetNthChildTypeID( ) gets the n'th child Type ID for the passed in parent. The function returns 0 if successful, otherwise it returns an error code.

The function TM_BinaryToString( ) converts the contents of a typed binary value into a C string containing one field per delimited section. During conversion, each field in turn is converted to the equivalent ASCII string and appended to the entire string with the specified delimiter sequence. If no delimiter is specified, a new-line character is used. The handle, ‘aStringHdl’, need not be empty on entry to this routine in which case the output of this routine is appended to whatever is already in the handle. If the type contains a variable sized array as its last field (i.e., stuff[ ]), it is important that ‘aDataPtr’ be a true heap allocated pointer since the pointer size itself will be used to determine the actual dimensions of the array. In the preferred embodiment, the following specialized options are also available:

kUnsignedAsHex—display unsigned numbers as hex

kCharArrayAsString—display char arrays as C strings

kShowFieldNames—prefix all values by fieldName:

kOneLevelDeepOnly—Do Not go down to evaluate sub-structures:

An additional function, hereinafter referred to as TM_StringToBinary( ), may also be provided in order to convert the contents of a C string of the format created by TM_BinaryToString( ) into the equivalent binary value in memory.

The API may also support calls to a function, hereinafter referred to as TM_LowestCommonAncestor( ), which obtains the lowest common ancestor type ID for the two type IDs specified. If either type ID is zero, the other type ID is returned. In the event that one type is ancestral to the other, it is most efficient to pass it as the ‘typeID2’ parameter.

Finally, a function, referred to as TM_DefineNewType( ), is disclosed that may be used to define a new type to be added to the specified types database by parsing the C type definition supplied in the string parameter. In the preferred embodiment, the C syntax typedef string is preserved in its entirety and attached to the type definition created so that it may be subsequently recalled. If no parent type ID is supplied, the newly created type is descended directly from the appropriate group type (e.g., structure, integer, real, union etc.) the typedef supplied must specify the entire structure of the type (i.e., all fields). If a parent type ID is supplied, the new type is created as a descendant of that type and the typedef supplied specifies only those fields that are additional to the parental type, NOT the entire type. This function is the key to how new types can be defined and incorporated into the type system at run time and for that reason is a critical algorithm to the present invention. The implementation is based on the parser technology described in Claimed Parser patent application and the lexical analyzer technology (the“Claimed Lexical Analyzer”) as provided in Appendix 3. As set forth above, those pending applications are fully incorporated herein. The reader is referred to those patents (as well as the Claimed Database patent application) for additional details. The BNF specification to create the necessary types parser (which interprets an extended form of the C language declaration syntax) is provided in Appendix A. The corresponding lexical analyzer specification is also provided in Appendix A.

As can be seen from the specifications in Appendix A, the types acquisition parser is designed to be able to interpret any construct expressible in the C programming language but has been extended to support additional features. The language symbols associated with these extensions to to C are as follows:

script—used to associate a script with a type or field

annotation—used to associate an annotation with a type or field

@—relative reference designator (like ‘*’ for a pointer)

@@—collection reference designator

#—persistent reference designator

<on>—script and annotation block start delimiter

<no>—script and annotation block end delimiter

><—echo field specification operator

In order to complete the types acquisition process, a ‘resolver’ function and at least one plug-in are provided. A pseudo code embodiment of one possible resolver is set forth in Appendix A. Since most of the necessary C language operations are already provided by the built-in parser plug-in zero, the only extention of this solution necessary for this application is the plug-in functionality unique to the type parsing problem itself. This will be referred to as plug-in one and the pseudo code for such a plug in is also provided in Appendix A.

The foregoing description of the preferred embodiments of the invention has been presented for the purposes of illustration and description. For example, although described with respect to the C programming language, any programming language could be used to implement this invention. Additionally, the claimed system and method should not be limited to the particular API disclosed. The descriptions of the header structures should also not be limited to the embodiments described. While the sample pseudo code provides examples of the code that may be used, the plurality of implementations that could in fact be developed is nearly limitless. For these reasons, this description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teaching. It is intended that the scope of the invention be limited not by this detailed description, but rather by the claims appended hereto.

APPENDIX 5 SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING COLLECTIONS OF DATA ON A NETWORK Inventor: John Fairweather BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

There are several problems associated with sharing aggregated data in a distributed environment. The primary problems involve: (1) enabling systems to share their “knowledge” of data; (2) enabling storage of data for distribution across the computing environment; and (3) a framework for efficiently creating, persisting, and sharing data across the network. The problem of defining a run-time type system capable of manipulating strongly typed binary information in a distributed environment has been addressed in a previous patent, attached hereto as Appendix 1, hereinafter referred to as the “Types Patent”. The second problem associated with sharing data in a distributed environment is the need for a method for creating and sharing aggregate collections of these typed data objects and the relationships between them. A system and method for achieving this is a ‘flat’, i.e., single contiguous allocation memory model, attached hereto as Appendix 2. This flat model, containing only ‘relative’ references, permits the data to be shared across the network while maintaining the validity of all data cross-references which are now completely independent of the actual data address in computer memory. The final problem that would preferably be addressed by such a system is a framework within which collections of such data can be efficiently created, persisted, and shared across the network. The goal of any system designed to address this problem should be to provide a means for manipulating arbitrary collections of interrelated typed data such that the physical location where the data is ‘stored’ is hidden from the calling code (it may in fact be held in external databases), and whereby collections of such data can be transparently and automatically shared by multiple machines on the network thus inherently supporting data ‘collaboration’ between the various users and processes on the network. Additionally, it should be a primary goal of such a framework that data ‘storage’ be transparently distributed, that is the physical storage of any given collection may be within multiple different containers and may be distributed across many machines on the network while providing the appearance to the user of the access API, of a single logical collection whose size can far exceed available computer memory.

Any system that addresses this problem would preferably support at least three different ‘container’ types within which the collection of data can transparently reside (meaning the caller of the API does not need to know how or where the data is actually stored). The first and most obvious is the simple case where the data resides in computer memory as supported by the ‘flat’ memory model. This container provides maximum efficiency but has the limitation that the collection size cannot exceed the RAM (or virtual) memory available to the process accessing it. Typically on modern computers with 32-bit architectures this puts a limit of around 2-4 GB on the size of a collection. While this is large for many applications, it is woefully inadequate for applications involving massive amounts of data in the terrabye or petabyte range. For this reason, a file-based storage container would preferably be implemented (involving one or more files) such that the user of a collection has only a small stub allocation in memory while all accesses to the bulk of the data in the collection are actually to/from file (possibly memory-cached for efficiency). Because the information in the flat memory model contains only ‘relative’ references, it is equally valid when stored and retrieved from file, and this is an essential feature when implementing ‘shadow’ containers. The file-based approach minimizes the memory footprint necessary for a collection thus allowing a single application to access collections whose total size far exceeds that of physical memory. There is essentially no limit to the size of data that can be manipulated in this manner, however, it generally becomes the case that with such huge data sets, one wants access to, and search of, the data to be a distributed problem, i.e., accomplished via multiple machines in parallel. For this reason, and for reasons of data-sharing and collaboration, a third kind of container, a ‘server-based’ collection would preferably be supported. Other machines on the network may ‘subscribe’ to any previously ‘published’ server-based collection and manipulate it through the identical API, without having to be aware of its possibly distributed server-based nature.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

The present invention provides an architecture for supporting all three container types. The present invention uses the following components: (1) a ‘flat’ data model wherein arbitrarily complex structures can be instantiated within a single memory allocation (including both the aggregation arrangements and the data itself, as well as any cross references between them via ‘relative’ references); (2) a run-time type system capable of defining and accessing binary strongly-typed data; (3) a set of ‘containers’ within which information encoded according to the system can be physically stored and preferably include a memory resident form, a file-based form, and a server-based form; (4) a client-server environment that is tied to the types system and capable of interpreting and executing all necessary collection manipulations remotely; (5) a basic aggregation structure providing as a mimimum a ‘parent’, ‘nextChild’, ‘previousChild’, ‘firstChild’, and ‘lastChild’ links or equivalents; and (6) a data attachment structure (whose size may vary) to which strongly typed data can be attached and which is associated in some manner with (and possibly identical to) a containing aggregation node in the collection. The invention enables the creation, management, retrieval, distribution of massively large collections of information that can be shared across a distributed network without building absolute references or even pre-existing knowlecge of the data and data structures being stored in such an environment.

The present invention also provides a number of additional features that extend this functionality in a number of important ways. For example, the aggregation models supported by the system and associated API include support for stacks, rings, arrays (multi-dimensional), queues, sets, N-trees, B-trees, and lists and arbitrary mixtures of these types within the same organizing framework including the provision of all the basic operations (via API) associated with the data structure type involved in addition to searching and sorting. The present invention further includes the ability to ‘internalize’ a non-memory based storage container to memory and thereafter automatically echoing all write actions to the actual container thereby gaining the performance of memory based reads with the assurance of persistence via automated echoing of writes to the external storage container. The present incention also supports server-based publishing of collections contents and client subscription thereto such that the client is transparently and automatically notified of all changes occurring to the server-based collection and is also able to transparently affect changes to that collection thereby facilitating automatic data collaborations between disparate nodes on the network. This invention and other improvements to such invention will be further explained below.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 illustrates a sample one-dimensional structure.

FIG. 2 illustrates a generalized N-Tree.

FIG. 3 illustrates a 2*3 two-dimensional array.

FIG. 4 illustrates a sample memory structure of a collection containing 3 ‘value’ nodes.

FIG. 5 illustratse a sample memory structure having various fields including references to other nodes in the collection.

FIG. 6 illustrates a diagrammatic representation of the null and dirty flags of the present invention.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT

For the purposes of this description, the existence of a client-server architecture tied to types via the ‘key data type’ concept, as disclosed in the Types Patent, such that the location of the server from which a given collection can be obtained will be assumed. The actual physical manifestation of a server-based collection may use any of the three container types described above (i.e., memory, file and server) thus it is possible to construct trees of server-based collections whose final physical form may be file or memory based.

To manipulate any arbitrary collection of related data in a distributed environment, some form of representation of an inherently complex and hierarchical collection of information is required. In the preferred embodiment, a ‘flat’ (i.e., single memory allocation) form of representation is used. The flat data-model technology attached hereto in Appendix 2 (hereinafter the “Memory Patent”) provides the ideal environment for achieving this. In order to understand many of the descriptions below, the reader is referred to the Memory Patent, which is incorporated by reference herein. Just two structure variants based on this model are needed to encode collection and data information, these are the ‘ET_Simplex’ structure (which is used to hold and access the typed data described via the ‘typeID’ using the run-time type system described in Appendix 1 attached hereto (hereinafter the “Types Patent”)) and the ‘ET_Complex’ structure (used to describe collections of data elements and the parent/child relationships between them). These two structures are set forth in pseudo code and defined below (in addition to the Memory Patent). typedef struct ET_Simplex // Simplex Type record { //  ET_Hdr hdr; // Standard header  int32 size; // size of simplex value (in bytes)  ET_Offset /* ET_Simplex */ nullFlags; // !!! ref. to null flags simplex  ET_Offset /* ET_Simplex */ dirtyFlags; // !!! ref. to dirty flags simplex  long notUsed[2]; // spare  char value[NULL_ARR]; // value (actual size varies) } ET_Simplex; // typedef struct ET_Complex // Complex Type record { //  ET_Hdr hdr; // Standard header  ET_LexHdl recognizer; // Name recognizer DB (if applicable)  Handle valueH; // handle to value of element  ET_Offset /* ET_SimplexPtr */ valueR; // ref to value simplex  union  {   ET_TypeID typeID; // ID of this type   struct   {    unsInt32 crc; // ID viewed as a pair of integers    unsInt32 flags;   } s;  } u;  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ nextElem; // !!! link to next element  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ prevElem; // !!! link to previous element  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ childHdr; // !!! link to first child element  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ childTail; // !!! link to last child element  long fromWhich; // collection type  int32 dimension; // current # of nodes children  char name[kNodeNameSize]; // element name  long tag; // tag value (if used)  ET_Offset /* ET_StringPtr */ description; // Description (if relevant)  ET_Offset /* ET_StringPtr */ tags; // !!! ref. to tags string  ET_ElementDestructor destructorFn; // Custom destructor function  unsInt32 shortCut; // Shortcut sequence (if any)  ET_ProcreatorFn procreator; // Procreator function  long notUsed[3]; // not used } ET_Complex; //

In the preferred embodiment, the various fields within the ET_Simplex structure are defined and used as follows:

“hdr”—This is a standard header record of type ET_Hdr

“size”—This field holds the size of the ‘value’ array (which contains the actual typed data) in bytes.

“nullFlags”—This is a relative reference to another ET_Simplex structure containing the null flags array.

“dirtyFlags”—This is a relative reference to another ET_Simplex structure containing the dirty flags array.

“value”—This variable sized field contains the actual typed data value as determined by the ‘typeID’ field of the parent complex record.

The various fields within the ET_Complex structure are defined and used as follows:

“hdr”—This is a standard header record of type ET_Hdr as

“recognizer”—This field may optionally hold a reference to a lexical analyzer based lookup table used for rapid lookup of a node's descendants in certain types of complex structure arrangements (e.g., a ‘set’). The use of such a recognizer is an optimization only.

“valueH”—Through the API described below, it is possible to associate a typed value with a node either by incorporating the value into the collection as a simplex record (referenced via the ‘valueR’ field), or by keeping the value as a separate heap-allocated value referenced directly from the ‘valueH’ field. The use of internal values via the ‘valueR’ field is the default and is preferred, however, some situations may require non-flat reference to external memory, and by use of the ‘valueH’ field, this is possible.

“valueR”—This field contains a relative reference to the ET_Simplex record containing the value of the node (if any).

“typeID”—This field (if non-zero) gives the type ID of the data held in the associated value record.

“prevElem”—This field holds a relative reference to the previous sibling record for this node (if any).

“nextElem”—This field holds a relative reference to the next sibling record for this node (if any).

“childHdr”—This field holds a relative reference to the first child record for the node (if any).

“childTail”—This field holds a relative reference to the last child record for the node (if any).

“from Which”—For a root node, this field holds the complex structure variant by which the descendants of the node are organized. The minimum supported set of such values (which supports most of the basic data aggregation metaphors in common use) is as follows (others are possible):

kFromArray—one dimensional array structure

kFromList—one directional List Structure

kFromStack—Stack structure

kFromQueue—Queue structure

kFromSet—Set Type

kFromBTree—Binary tree

kFromNTree—Generalized Tree with variable branches/node

kFromArrayN—N dimensional array structure

“dimension”—Although it is possible to find the number of children of a given node by walking the tree, the dimension field also holds this information. In the case of multi-dimensional array accesses, the use of the dimension field is important for enabling efficient access.

“name”—Each complex node in a collection may optionally be named. A node's name is held in the “name” field. By concatenating names of a node and its ancestors, one can construct a unique path from any ancestral node to any descendant node.

“tag”—This field is not utilized internally by this API and is provided to allow easy tagging and searching of nodes with arbitratry integer values.

“description”—Arbitrary textual descriptions may be attached to any node using this field via the API provided.

“tags”—This string field supports the element tags portion of the API (see below).

“destructorFn”—If a node requires custom cleanup operations when it is destroyed, this can be accomplished by registering a destructor function whose calling address is held in this field and which is guaranteed to be called when the node is destroyed.

“shortcut”—This field holds an encoded version of a keyboard shortcut which can be translated into a node reference via the API. This kind of capability is useful in UI related applications of collections as for example the use of a tree to represent arbitrary hierarchical menus.

“procreator”—This field holds the address of a custom child node procreator function registered via the API. Whenever an attempt is made to obtain the first child of a given node, if a procreator is present, it will first be called and given an opportunity to create or alter the child nodes. This allows “lazy evaluation” of large and complex trees (e.g., a disk directory) to occur only when the user actions actually require the inner structure of a given node to be displayed.

Given the structures described above, it is clear that implementation of a one-dimensional structure is simply a matter of connecting the ‘next’ and ‘prev’ links of ET_Complex records and then providing the appropriate operations for the logical type (e.g., push/pop for a stack, queue/dequeue for a queue etc.). One familiar with data structures can readily deduce the actual algorithms involved in implementing all such operations given knowledge of the representation above.

Referring now to FIG. 1, a graphical representation of a sample one-dimensional structure is provided. In this figure, ‘root’ node 100 contains three child elements 120, 130, 140, all of which have the root node 110 as their direct parent but which are linked 125, 135 as siblings through the ‘next’ and ‘prev’ fields.

Referring now to FIG. 2, a graphical representation of a generalized N-Tree is shown. In this figure, the root node 205 has three child nodes 210, 215, 220 and child node 215 in turn has two children 225, 230 with node 230 itself having a single child node 235. It should be readily apparent how this approach can be extended to trees of arbitrary depth and complexity. To handle the representation of multi-dimensional arrays, we would preferably introduce additional ‘dimension’ nodes that serve to organize the ‘leaf’ or data-bearing nodes in a manner that can be efficiently accessed via array indeces.

Referring now to FIG. 3, a graphical representation of a 2*3 two-dimensional array is shown. In this figure, the six nodes 320, 325, 330, 335, 340, 345 are the actual data-bearing nodes of the array. The nodes 310, 315 are introduced by the API in order to provide access to each ‘row’ of 3 elements in the array. In fact a unique feature of the array implementation in this model is that these grouping nodes can be addressed by supplying an incomplete set of indeces to the API (i.e., instead of [n,m] for a 2-D array, specify [n]) which allows operations to be trivially performed on arrays that are not commonly available (e.g., changing row order). It is clear that this approach can be extended to any number of dimensions, thus for a 3-dimensional array [2*3*4], each of the nodes 320, 325, 330, 335, 340, 345 would become a parent/grouping node to a list of four child data-bearing nodes. In order to make array accesses as efficiently as possible, an additional optimization in the case of arrays whose dimensions are known at the time the collection is constructed by taking advantage of knowledge of how the allocation of contiguous node records occurs in the flat memory model. That is the offset of a desired child node for a given dimension can be calculated by “off=index*m*sizeof(ET_Complex)”, thus the offset to any node in a multi-dimensional array can be efficiently obtained by recursively applying this calculation for each dimension and summing the results.

In the preferred embodiment, any node in a collection can be designated to be a new root whose ‘fromWhich’ may vary from that of its parent node (see TC_MakeRoot). This means for example that one can create a tree of arrays of stacks etc. Besause this model permits changes to the aggregation model at any root node while maintaining the ability to directly navigate from one aggregation to the next, complex group manipulations are also supported and are capable of being performed very simply.

In order to handle the various types of non-memory storage containers associated with collections in a transparent manner, the present invention preferably includes a minimum memory ‘stub’ that contains sufficient information to allow access to the actual container. In the preferred embodiment, this ‘stub’ is comprised of a standard ‘ET_TextDB’ header record (see the Memory Patent) augmented by additional collection container fields. An example of such a header record in pseudo code follows: typedef struct ET_FileRef // file reference structure {  short fileID; // file ID for open file  ??? fSpec; // file reference (platform dependant?)  ??? buff; // file buffering (platform dependant?) } ET_FileRef; typedef struct ET_ComplexServerVariant {  char collectionRef[128]; // unique string identifying collection  OSType server; // server data type (0 if not server-based) } ET_ComplexServerVariant; typedef union ET_ComplexContainer {  ET_FileRef file; // file spec of file-based mirror file  ET_ComplexServerVariant host; // server container } ET_ComplexContainer; typedef struct ET_ComplexObjVariant {  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ garbageHdr; // header to collection garbage list  ET_Offset /* ET_ComplexPtr */ rootRec; // root record of collection  int32 options; // logical options on create call  ET_Offset /* ET_HdrPtr */ endRec; // offset to last container record  unsInt64 tags[8]; // eight available 64-bit tags  ET_ComplexContainer container; // non-memory container reference } ET_ComplexObjVariant; typedef struct ET_TextDBvariant {  ET_ComplexObjVariant complex; // complex collection variant  ... // other variants not discussed herein }; typedef struct ET_TextDB // Standard allocation header record {  ET_Hdr hdr; // Standard heap data reference fields  ET_Offset /* ET_StringPtr */ name; // ref. to name of database  ... // other fields not discussed herein  ET_TextDBvariant u; // variant types } ET_TextDB;

By examining the ‘options’ field of such a complex object variant (internally to the API), it is possible to identify if a given collection is memory, file, or server-based and, by using the additional fields defined above, it is also possible to determine where the collection resides. One embodiment of a basic code structure which supports implementation of any of the API calls defined below is defined as follows: MyAPIcall (ET_CollectionHdl aCollection,...) {  if ( collection is server-based )  {   pack necessary parameters into a server command   send the command to server u.complex.host.server   unpack the returned results as required  } else if ( collection is file-based )  {   perform identical operations to the memory case but by file I/O access   if this collection is published    echo all changes to any subscribers  } else  {   perform the operation on the flat memory model   if ( the collection has been ‘internalized’ from file    echo all changes to the file   if this collection is published    echo all changes to any subscribers  } }

In the memory based case, the code checks to see if the collection is actually an ‘internalized’ file-based collection (see option ‘kInternalizeIfpossible’ as defined below) and if so, echoes all operations to the file. This allows for an intermediate state in terms of efficiency between the pure memory-based and the file-based containers in that all read operations on such an internalized collection occur with the speed of memory access while only write operations incur the overhead of file I/O, and this can be buffered/batched as can be seen from the type definitions above. Note also that in both the file and memory based cases, the collection may have been ‘published’ and thus it may be necessary to notify the subscribers of any changes in the collection. This is also the situation inside the server associated with a server-based collection. Within the server, the collection appears to be file/memory based (with subscribers), whereas to the subscribers themselves, the collection (according to the memory stub) appears to be server-based.

Server-based collections may also be cached at the subscriber end for efficiency purposes. In such a case, it may be necessary to notify the subscribers of the exact changes made to the collection. This enables collaboration between multiple subscribers to a given collection and this collaboration at the data representation level is essential in any complex distributed system. The type of collaboration supported by such a system is far more powerful that the UI-level collaboration in the prior art because it leaves the UI of each user free to display the data in whatever manner that user has selected while ensuring that the underlying data (that the UI is actually visualizing) remains consistent across all clients. This automation and hiding of collaboration is a key feature of this invention. In the preferred embodiment, the UI itself can also be represented by a collection, and thus UI-level collaboration (i.e., when two users screens are synchronized to display the same thing) is also available as a transparent by-product of this approach simply by having one user ‘subscribe’ to the UI collection of the other.

Referring now to FIG. 4, a sample memory structure of a collection containing 3 ‘value’ nodes is shown. As explained above, the job of representing aggregates or collections of data is handled primarily by the ET_Complex records 405, 410, 415, 420, while that of holding the actual data associated with a given node is handled by the ET_Simplex records 425, 430, 435. One advantage of utilizing two separate records to handle the two aspects is that the ET_Simplex records 425, 430, 435 can be variably sized depending on the typeID of the data within them, whereas the ET_Complex records 405, 410, 415, 420 are of a fixed size. By separating the two records, the navigation of the complex records 405, 410, 415, 420 is optimized. In the preferred embodiment, the various fields of a given type may also include references to other nodes in the collection either via relative references (denoted by the ‘@’ symbol), collection references (denoted by the ‘@@’ symbol) or persistent references (denoted by the ‘#’ symbol). This means, for example, that one of the fields of a simplex record 425, 430, 435 may in-fact refer to a new collection with a new root node embedded within the same memory allocation as the parent collection that contains it.

Referring now to FIG. 5, a sample memory structure having various fields including references to other nodes in the collection is shown. In this figure, the ‘value’ of a node 425 represents an organization. In this case, one of the fields is the employees of the organization. This figure illustrates the three basic types of references that may occur between the various ET_Simplex records 425, 430, 435, 525, 530, 535, 540 and ET_Complex records 405, 410, 415, 420, 505, 510, 515, 520 in a collection. The relative reference ‘@’ occurs between two simplex nodes 525, 540 in the collection, so that if the ‘notes’ field of a node 525 were an arbitrary length character string, it would be implemented as a relative reference (char @notes) to another simplex record 540 containing a single variable sized character array. This permits the original “Person” record 525 to have fixed size and an efficient memory footprint, while still being able to contain fields of arbitrary complexity within it by relative reference to another node 540. Another use of such a reference might be to a record containing a picture of the individual. This would be implemented in an identical manner (Picture @picture) but the referenced type would be a Picture type rather than a character array.

The collection reference ‘@@’ in record 425 indicates that a given field refers to a collection 500 (possibly hierarchical) of values of one or more types and is mediated by a relative reference between the collection field of record 425 and the root node 505 of an embedded collection 500 containing the referenced items. In the preferred embodiment, this embedded collection 500 is in all ways identical to the outer containing collection 400, but may only be navigated to via the field that references it. It is thus logically isolated from the outermost collection 400. Thus the field declaration “Person @@employees” in record 425 implies a reference to a collection 500 of Person elements. Obviously collections can be nested within each other to an arbitrary level via this approach and this gives incredible expressive power while still maintaining the flat memory model. Thus for example one might reference a ‘car’, which internally might reference all the main components (engine, electrical system, wheels) that make up the cat, which may in turn be built up from collections of smaller components engine parts, electrical components, etc).

The persistent reference ‘#’, illustrated as a field in record 525, is a singular reference from a field of an ET_Simplex record to an ET_Complex node containing a value of the same or a different type. The reference node can be in an embedded collection 500 or more commonly in an outer collection 400. In this case the ‘employer’ field of each employee of a given organization (#employer) would be a persistent reference to the employing organization as shown in the diagram. Additional details of handling and resolving collection and persistent references is provided in Appendix 2.

In order to make efficient use of any space freed up by deleted nodes, the collections mechanism can also maintain a garbage list, headed by a field in the collection variant of the base ET_TextDB record. Whenever any record is deleted, it could added into a linked list headed by this field and whenever a new record is allocated the code would first examine the garbage list to find any unused space that most closely fits the needs of the record being added. This would ensure that the collection did not become overly large or fragmented, and to the extent that the ET_Complex nodes and many of the ET_Simplex nodes have fixed sizes, this reclamation of space is almost perfect.

Another key feature of this invention is the concept of ‘dirty’ and ‘null’ flags, and various API calls are provided for this purpose (as described below). The need for ‘null’ flags is driven by the fact that in real world situations there is a difference between a field having an undefined or NULL value and that field having the value zero. In database situations, an undefined value is distinguished from a zero value because semantically they are very different, and zero may be a valid defined value. Similarly, the present invention may use null and dirty flags to distinguish such situations. Referring now to FIG. 6, a diagrammatic representation of the null and dirty flags of the present invention are shown. In this figure, the null and dirty flags are implemented by associating child simplex record 610 with any given simplex for which empty/dirty tracking is required as depicted below. Each flags array is simply a bit-field containing as many bits as there are fields in the associated type and whose dimensions are given by the value of TM_GetTypeMaxFlagIndex( ) (see Types Patent). If a field 610 has a null value, the corresponding bit in the ‘nullFlags’ record 611 is set to one, otherwise it is zero. Similarly, if a field 610 is ‘dirty’, the corresponding bit in the ‘dirtyFlags’ record 612 is set to one, otherwise it is zero. The requirement for the ‘dirty’ flag is driven by the need to track what has changed within a given record since it was first instantiated. This comes up particularly when the record is being edited by an associated UI. By examining the dirty flags after such an editing session it is possible to determine exactly which fields need to be updated to external storage such as an associated relational database.

In certain situations, especially those encountered when implementing high performance servers for data held in the collection model, it is necessary to add additional binary descriptive and reference fields to the the collection to facilitate efficient navigation (e.g., in an inverted file implementation). The present invention supports this functionality by allowing the ET_Complex record to be extended by an arbitrary number of bytes, hereinafter termed ‘extra bytes’, within which information and references can be contained that are known only to the server (and which are not shared with clients/subscribers). This is especially useful for security tags and similar information that would preferably be maintained in a manner that is not accessible from the clients of a given collection. This capability would generally need to be customized for any particular server-based implementation.

Another requirement for effective sharing of information across the network is to ensure that all clients to a given collection have a complete knowledge of any types that may be utilized within the collection. Normally subscribers would share a common types hierarchy mediated via the types system (such as that described in the Types Patent. Such a types system, however, could also include the ability to define temporary and proxy types. In the case of a shared collection, this could lead to problems in client machines that are unaware of the temporary type. For this reason, the collections API (as described below) provides calls that automatically embed any such type definitions in their source (C-like) form within the collection. The specialized types contained within a collection could then be referenced from a field of the ET_TextDB header record and simply held in a C format text string containing the set of type definition sources. Whenever code subscribes to a collection, the API automatically examines this field and instantiates/defines all types found in the local context (see TM_DefineNewType described below). Similarly when new types are added to the collection, the updates to this type definition are propagated (as for all other changes except extra-bytes within the collection) and thus the clients of a given collection are kept up to date with the necessary type information for its interpretation.

When sharing and manipulating large amounts of data, it is also often necessary to associate arbitrary textual and typed binary tags with the data held within a collection. Examples of this might be tags associated with UI appearance, user annotations on the data, etc. This invention fully supports this capability via the “element Tag” API calls provided to access them. In the preferred embodiment, the element tags associated with a given node in the collection are referenced via the ‘tags’ field of the ET_Complex record which contains a relative reference to a variable sized ET_String record containing the text for the tags. In a manner identical to that used in annotations and scripts (described below), tags could consist of named blocks of arbitrary text delimited by the “<on>” and “<no>” delimiter sequences occurring at the start of a line. The “<on>” delimiter is followed by a string on the same line which gives the name of the tag involved. By convention, all tag names start with the ‘$’ character in order to distinguish them from field names which do not. Some of the API calls below support access to tags as well as fields via dual use of the ‘fieldName’ parameter. For example, it is possible to sort the elements of a collection based on the associated tags rather than the data within. This can be very useful in some applications involving the manipulation and grouping of information via attributes that are not held directly within the data itself. In an implementation in which the tags are associated with the ET_Complex record, not the ET_Simplex, the collections can be created and can contain and display information without the need to actually define typed values. This is useful in many situations because tags are not held directly in a binary encoding. While this technique has the same undesirable performance penalties of other text-based data tagging techniques such as XML, it also provides all the abilities of XML tagging over and above the binary types mechanism described previously, and indeed the use of standardized delimiters is similar to that found in XML and other text markup languages. In such an implemtation, when accessing tag information, the string referenced by the ‘tags’ field is searched for the named tag and the text between the start and end delimiters stripped out to form the actual value of the tag. By use of a standardized mechanism for converting binary typed values to/from the corresponding text string, tags themselves may be strongly typed (as further illustrated by the API calls below) and this capability could be used extensively for specialized typed tags associated with the data. Tags may also be associated either with the node itself, or with individual fields of the data record the node contains. This is also handled transparently via the API by concatenating the field path with the tag name to create unique field-specific tags where necessary. As will be understood by those skilled in the art, the ability to associate arbitrary additional textual and typed tags with any field of a given data value within the collection allows a wide range of powerful capabilities to be implemented on top of this model.

Appendix A provides a listing of a basic API suite that may be used in conjunction with the collection capability of this invention. This API is not intended to be exhaustive, but is indicative of the kinds of API calls that are necessary to manipulate information held in this model. The following is a brief description of the function and operation of each function listed, from which, given the descriptions above, one skilled in the art would be able to implement the system of this invention.

A function that may be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetCollectionName( ), sets the name of a collection (as returned by TC_GetCollectionName) to the string specified. A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetCollectionName( ), that obtains the name of a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_FindEOFhandle( ), that finds the offset of the final null record in a container based collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetCollectionTag( ) and TC_GetCollectionTag( ), that allow access to and modification of the eight 64-bit tag values associated with every collection. In the preferred embodiment, these tag values are not used internally and are available for custom purposes.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetCollectionFlags( ), TC_ClrCollectionFlags( ), and TC_GetCollectionFlags( ), that would allow access to and modification of the flags associated with a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_StripRecognizers( ), which strips the recognizers associated with finding paths in a collection. The only effect of this would be to slow down symbolic lookup but would also save a considerable amount of memory.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_StripCollection( ), strips off any invalid memory references that may have been left over from the source context.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_OpenContainer( ), opens the container associated with a collection (if any). In the preferred embodiment, once a collection container has been closed using TC_CloseContainer( ), the collection API functions on the collection itself would not be usable until the container has been re-opened. The collection container is automatically created/opened during a call to TC_CreateCollection( ) so no initial TC_OpenContainer( ) call is required.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_CloseContainer( ), closes the container associated with a collection (if any). In the preferred embodiment, once a collection container has been closed using TC_CloseContainer( ), the collection API functions on the collection itself would not be usable until the container had been re-opened.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetContainerSpec( ), may be used to obtain details of the container for a collection. In the preferred embodiment, if the collection is not container based, this function would return 0. If the container is file-based, the ‘specString’ variable would be the full file path. If the container is server-based, ‘serverSpec’ would contain the server concerned and ‘specString’ would contain the unique string that identifies a given collection of those supported by a particular server.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetDataOffset( ), may be used to obtain the offset (in bytes) to the data associated with a given node in a collection. For example, this offset may be used to read and write the data value after initial creation via TC_ReadData( ) and TC_WriteData( ).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetRecordOffset( ), may be used to obtain the record offset (scaled) to the record containing the data associated with a given node in a collection. This offset may be used in calculating the offset of other data within the collection that is referenced from within a field of the data itself (via a relative, persistent, or collection offset—@, #, or @@). For example if you have a persistent reference field (ET_PersistentRef) from collection element ‘sourceElem’ within which the ‘elementRef’ field is non-zero, the element designation for the target element (‘targetElem’, i.e., a scaled offset from the start of the collection for the target collection node) can be computed as:

-   -   targetElem=perfP.elementRef+TC_GetRecordOffset(aCollection,0,0,sourceElem,NO);

The corresponding data offset for the target element would then be:

targetDataOff=TC_GetDataOffset(aCollection,0,0,targetElem);

Functions that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_RelRefToDataOffset( ), TC_DataOffsetToRelRef( ), TC_RelRefToRecordOffset( ), TC_DataToRecordOffset( ), TC_RecordToDataOffset( ), TC_ByteToScaledOffset( ), and TC_ScaledToByteOffset( ), could be used to convert between the “data offset” values used in this API (see TC_GetDataOffset, TC_ReadData, TC_WriteData, and TC_CreateData), and the ET_Offset values used internally to store relative references (i.e., ‘@’ fields). In the preferred embodiment, the routine TC_RefToRecordOffset( ) would be used in cases where the reference is to an actual record rather than the data it contains (e.g., collection element references). Note that because values held in simplex records may grow, it may be the case that the “data offset” and the corresponding “record offset” are actually in two very different simplex records. In on embodiment, the “record offset” always refers to the ‘base’ record of the simplex, whereas the “data offset” will be in the ‘moved’ record of the simplex if applicable. For this reason, it is essential that these (or similar) functions are used when accessing collections rather than attempting more simplistic calculations based on knowledge of the structures, as such calculations would almost certainly be erroneous.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_RelRefToElementDesignator( ), which could be used to return the element designator for the referenced element, given a relative reference from one element in a collection to another.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_PersRefToElementDesignator( ), which could be used to return the element designator for the referenced element, given a persistent or collection reference (e.g., the elementRef field of either) from the value of one element in a collection to the node element of another.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_ElementDesignatorToPersRef( ), which, if given an element designator, could return the relative reference for a persistent or collection reference (e.g., the elementRef field of either) from the value of one element in a collection to the node element of another.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_ValueToElementDesignator( ), given the absolute ET_Offset to a value record (ET_Simplex) within a collection, could be used to return the element designator for the corresponding collection node (element designator). This might be needed, for example, with the result of a call to TC_GetFieldPersistentElement( ).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_LocalizeRelRefs( ), can be called to acheive the following effect for an element just added to the collection: It is often convenient for relative references (i.e., @fieldName) to be held as pointer values until the time the record is actually added to the collection. At this time the pointer values held in any relative reference fields would preferably be converted to the appropriate relative reference and the original (heap allocated) pointers disposed.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_ReadData( ), can be used to read the value of a collection node (if any) into a memory buffer. In the preferred embodiment, this routine would primarily be used within a sort function as part of a ‘kFindCPX’ (TC_Find) or kSortCPX (TC_Sort) call. The purpose for supplying this call is to allow sort functions to optimize their container access or possibly cache results (using the custom field in the sort record). The collection handle can be obtained from “elementRef.theView” for one of the comparison records, the ‘size’ parameter is the ‘size’ field of the record (or less) and the ‘offset’ parameter is the “u.simplexOff” field. In such a case, the caller would be responsible for ensuring that the ‘aBuffer’ buffer is large enough to hold ‘size’ bytes of data.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_WriteData( ), which could be used to write a new value into an existing node within a collection handle.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_WriteFieldData( ), which could be used to write a new value into a field of an existing node within a collection handle.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_CreateData( ), could be used to create and write a new unattached data value into a collection. The preferred way of adding data to a collection is to use TC_SetValue( ). In the case where data within a collection makes a relative reference (i.e, via a ‘@’ field) to other data within the collection, however, the other data may be created using this (or a similar) function.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_CreateRootNode( ), could be used to create and write a new unattached root node into a collection handle. In the case where data within a collection makes a collection reference (i.e, via a ‘@@’ field) to other data that is to be internalized into the same collection handle, it is preferable to create an entirely seperate root node that is not directly part of the parent collection yet lies within the same handle.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_CreateRecord( ), could be used to create specified structures within a collection, including all necessary structures to handle container based objects and persistent storage. In the preferred embodiment, the primary purpose for using this routine would be to create additional structures within the collection (usually of kSimplexRecord type) that can be referenced from the fields of other collection elements. Preferably, this type of function would only be used to create the following structure types: kSimplexRecord, kStringRecord, kComplexRecord.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_CreateCollection( ), could be used to create (initialize) a collection, i.e. a container object—such as an array, or a tree, or a queue or stack, or a set—to hold objects of any type which may appear in the Type Manager database. For example, if the collection object is an array, then a size, or a list of sizes, would preferably be supplied. If the collection is of unspecified size, no sizing parameter need be specified. Possible collection types and the additional parameters that would preferably be supplied to create them are as follows:

kFromList—List Structure

kFromStack—Stack structure

kFromQueue—Queue structure

kFromSet—Set

kFromBTree—Binary tree

kFromNTree—Generalized Tree

no additional parameters

kFromArray—one dimensional array structure

dimension1 (int32)—array dimension (as in C)

kFromArrayN—N dimensional array structure

N (int32)—number of dimensions

dimension1 (int32)—array dimension 1 (as in C)

dimensionN (int32)—array dimension N (as in C)

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_KillReferencedMemory( ), which could be provided in order to clean up all memory associated with the set of data records within a collection. This does not include any memory associated with the storage of the records themselves, but simply any memory that the fields within the records reference either via pointers or handles. Because a collection may contain nested collections to any level, this routine would preferably recursively walk the entire collection hierarchy, regardless of topology, looking for simplex records and for each such record found, would preferably de-allocate any referenced memory. It is assumed that all memory referenced via a pointer or a handle from any field within any structure represents a heap allocation that can be disposed by making the appropriate memory manager call. It is still necessary to call TC_DisposeCollection( ) after making this call in order to clean up memory associated with the collection itself and the records it contains.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_DisposeCollection( ), which could be provided in order to delete a collection. If the collection is container based, then this call will dispose of the collection in memory but has no effect on the contents of the collection in the container. The contents of containers can only be destroyed by deleting the container itself (e.g., if the container is a file then the file would preferably be deleted).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_PurgeCollection( ), which could be provided in order to compact a collection by eliminating all unused records. After a long sequence of adds and deletes from a collection, a ‘garbage’ list of records may build up containing records that are not currently used but which are available for recycling, these records are eliminated by this call. Following a purge, all references to internal elements of the collection may be invalidated since the corresponding record could have moved. It is essential that you re-compute all such internal references after a purge.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_CloneRecord( ), which could be provided in order to clone an existing record from one node of a collection to another node, possibly in a different collection. Various options allow the cloning of other records referenced by the record being cloned. Resolved persistent and collection references within the record are not cloned and would preferably be re-resolved in the target. If the structure contains memory references and you do not specify ‘kCloneMemRefs’, then memory references (pointers and handles found in the source are NULL in the target), otherwise the memory itself is cloned before inserting the corresponding reference in the target node. If the ‘kCloneRelRefs’ option is set, relative references, such as those to strings are cloned (the cloned references are to new copies in the target collection), otherwise the corresponding field is set to zero.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_CloneCollection( ), which could be provided in order to clone all memory associated with a type manager collection, including all memory referenced from fields within the collection (if ‘recursive’ is true).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_AppendCollection( ), which could be provided in order to append a copy of one collection in its entirety to the designated node of another collection. In this manner multiple existing collections could be merged into a single, larger collection. In the preferred embodiment, when merging the collections, the root node of the collection being appended and all nodes below it, are transferred to the target collection with the transferred root node becoming the first child node of non-leaf ‘tgtNode’ in the target collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_PossessDisPossessCollection( ), which could be provided in order to can be used to possess/dispossess all memory associated with a type manager collection, including all memory referenced from fields within the collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_LowestCommonAncestor( ), which could be provided in order to search the collection from the parental point designated and determine the lowest common ancestral type ID for all elements within.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_FindFirstDescendant( ), which could be provided in order to search the collection from the parental point designated and find the first valued node whose type is equal to or descendant from the specified type.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_IsValidOperation( ), which could be provided in order to determine if a given operation is valid for the specified collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_vComplexOperation( ), which is identical to TC_ComplexOperation( ) but could instead take a variable argument list parameter which would preferably be set up in the caller as in the following example: va_list ap; Boolean res; va_start (ap, aParameterName); res = TC_vComplexOperation(aCollection,theParentRef,anOperation, options,&ap); va_end(ap);

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_ComplexOperation( ), which could be provided in order to perform a specified operation on a collection. In the preferred embodiment, the appropriate specific wrapper functions define the operations that are possible, the collection types for which they are supported, and the additional parameters that would preferably be specified to accomplish the operation. Because of the common approach used to implement the various data structures, it is possible to apply certain operations to collection types for which those operations would not normally be supported. These additional operations could be very useful in manipulating collections in ways that the basic collection type would make difficult.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Pop( ), which could be provided in order to pop a stack. When applied to a Queue, TC_Pop( ) would remove the last element added, when applied to a List or set, it would remove the last entry in the list or set. When applied to a tree, the tail child node (and any children) is removed. For a stack, the pop action follows normal stack behavior. This function may also be refered to as TC_RemoveRight( ) when applied to a binary tree.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Push( ), which could be provided in order to push a stack. When applied to a List or Set, this function would add an element to the end of the list/set. When applied to a tree, a new tail child node would be added. For a stack, the push action follows normal stack behavior. This function may also be refered to as TC_EnQueue( ) when applied to a queue, or TC_AddRight( ) when applied to a binary tree.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Insert( ), could be provided in order to insert an element into a complex collection list.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetExtraBytes( ), could allow the value of the extra bytes associated with a collection element node record (if any) to be set. In the preferred embodiment, the use of this facility is strongly discouraged except in cases where optimization of collection size is paramount. Enlarged collection nodes can be allocated by passing a non-zero value for the ‘extraBytes’ parameter to TC_Insert( ). This call would create additional empty space after the node record that can be used to store an un-typed fixed sized record which can be retreived and updated using calls such as TC_GetExtraBytes( ) and TC_SetExtraBytes( ) respectively. This approach is primarily justified because the additional bytes do not incur the overhead of the ET_Simplex record that normally contains the value of a collection element's node and which is accessed by all other TC_API calls. If data is associated with a node in this manner, a destructure function would preferably be associated with a node to be disposed when the collection is killed, such as making a call to a function such as TC_SetElementDestructor( ).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetExtraBytes( ), which could be provided in order to get the value of the extra bytes associated with a collection element node record (if any). See TC_SetExtraBytes( ) for details.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Remove( ), could be provided in order to remove the value (if any) from a collection node.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_IndexRef( ), could be provided in order to obtain a reference ‘ET_Offset’ to a specified indexed element (indeces start from 0). This reference can be used for many other operations on collections. When used to access data in a multi-dimensional array, it is essential that all array indeces are specified. However, each ‘dimension’ of a multi-dimensional array can be seperately manipulated using a number of operations (e.g., sort) and thus a partial set of indeces may be used to obtain a reference to the elements of such a dimension (which do not normally contain data themselves, though they could do) in order to manipulate the elements of that dimension. In this manner, a multi-dimensional array can be regarded as a specialized case of a tree. When multiple indeces are used to refer to a tree, later indeces in the list refer to deeper elements of the tree. In such a case, a subset of the indeces should be specified in order to access a given parental node in the tree. Note that in the tree case, the dimensionality of each tree node may vary and thus using such an indexed reference would only make sense if a corresponding element exists.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_MakeRoot( ), could be provided in order to convert a collection element to the root of a new subordinate collection. This operation can be used to convert a leaf node of an existing collection into the root node of a new subordinate collection. This is the mechanism used to create collections within collections. Non-leaf nodes cannot be converted.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Sort( ), could be provided in order to sort the children of the specified parent node according to a sorting function specified in the ‘cmpFun’ parameter. Sorting may be applied to any collection type, including arrays. Note that the comparision function is passed two references to a record of type ‘ET_ComplexSort’. Within these records is a reference to the original complex element, as well as any associated data and the type ID. The ‘fromWhich’ field of the record will be non-zero if the call relates to a non-leaf node (for example in a tree). The ‘kRecursiveOperation’ option applies for hierarchical collections.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_UnSort( ), which could be provided in order to un-sort the children of the specified parent node back into increasing memory order. For arrays, this is guaranteed to be the original element order, however, for other collection types where elements can be added and removed, it does not necessarily correspond since elements that have been removed may be re-cycled later thus violating the memory order property. The ‘kRecursiveOperation’ option applies for hierarchical collections.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SortByField( ), which could be provided in order to sort the children of the specified parent node using a built-in sorting function which sorts based on specified field path which would preferably refer to a field whose type is built-in (e.g., integers, strings, reals, struct etc.) or some descendant of one of these types. Sorting may be applied to any collection type, including arrays. The ‘kRecursiveOperation’ option applies for hierarchical collections. In the preferred embodiment, if more complex sorts are desired, TC_Sort( ) short should be used and and ‘cmpFun’ supplied. This function also could also be used to support sorting by element tags (field name starts with ‘$’).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_DeQueue( ), could be provided in order to de-queue an element from the front of a queue. The operation is similar to popping a stack except that the element comes from the opposite end of the collection. In the preferred embodiment, when applied to any of the other collection types, this operation would return the first element in the collection. This function may also be refered to as TC_RemoveLeft( ) when applied to a binary tree.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Next( ), which could be provided in order to return a reference to the next element in a collection given a reference to an element of the collection. If there is no next element, the function would return FALSE.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Prev( ), which could be provided in order to return a reference to the previous element in a collection given a reference to an element of the collection. If there is no previous element, the function returns FALSE.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Parent( ), which could be provided in order to return a reference to the parent element of a collection given a reference to an element of the collection. In the preferred embodiment, the value passed in the ‘theParentRef’ parameter is ignored and should thus be set to zero.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_RootRef( ), could be provided in order to return a reference to the root node of a collection. This (or a similar) call would only be needed if direct root node manipulation is desired which could be done by specifying the value returned by this function as the ‘anElem’ parameter to another call. Note that root records may themselves be directly part of a higher level collection. The check for this case can be performed by using TC_Parent( ) which will return 0 if this is not true.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_RootOwner( ), could be provided in order to return a reference to the simplex structure that references the collection containing the element given. In the preferred embodiment, if the element is part of the outermost colllection, it is by definition not owned and this function returns false. If the root node is not owned/referenced by a simplex record, this function returns false, otherwise true. If the collection containing ‘anElem’ contains directly nested collections, this routine will climb the tree of collections until it finds the owning structure (or fails).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Head( ), could be provided in order to return a reference to the head element in a collection of a given parent reference. If there is no head element, the function would return FALSE. For a binary tree, TC_LeftChild( ) would preferably be used.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Tail( ), could be provided in order to return a reference to the tail element in a collection of a given parent reference. If there is no tail element, the function would return FALSE. For a binary tree, TC_RightChild( ) would preferably be used.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Exchange( ), could be provided in order to exchange two designated elements of a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Count( ), could be provided in order to return the number of child elements for a given parent. In the preferred embodiment, for non-hierarchical collections, this call would return the number of entries in the collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetValue( ), could be provided in order to set the value of a designated collection element to the value and type ID specified.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetFieldValue( ), which could be provided in order to set the value of a field within the specified collection element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetAnonRefFieldPtr( ), which could be provided in order to obtain a heap pointer corresponding to a reference field (either pointer, handle, or relative). The field value would preferably already have been retreived into an ET_DataRef buffer. In the case of a pointer or handle reference, this function is trivial, in the case of a relative reference, the function would perform the following:

-   -   doff=TC_RefToDataOffset(aDataRef->relativeRef,TC_GetDataOffset(aCollection,0,0,anElem));         -   TC_ReadData(aCollection,0,doff,0,&cp,0);         -   return cp;

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetCStringRefFieldPtr( ), which could be provided in order to obtain the C string corresponding to a reference field (either pointer, handle, or relative). The field value would preferably already have been retreived into an ET_DataRef buffer. In the case of a pointer or handle reference, this function is trivial, in the case of a relative reference, the function would perform the following:

-   -   doff=TC_RefToDataOffset(aDataRef->relativeRef,TC_GetDataOffset(aCollection,0,0,anElem));     -   TC_ReadData(aCollection,0,doff,0,&cp,0);     -   return cp;

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetCStringFieldValue( ), which could be provided in order to set the C string field of a field within the specified collection element. Ideally, this function would also transparently handle all logic for the various allowable C-string fields as follows:

1) if the field is a charHdl then:

-   -   a) if the field already contains a value, update/grow the         existing handle to hold the new value     -   b) otherwise allocate a handle and assign it to the field

2) if the field is a charPtr then:

-   -   a) if the field already contains a value:         -   i) if the previous string is equal to or longer than the new             one, copy new string into existing pointer         -   ii) otherwise dispose of previous pointer, allocate a new             one and assign it     -   b) otherwise allocate a pointer and assign it to the field

3) if the field is a relative reference then:

-   -   a) if the reference already exists, update its contents to hold         the new string     -   b) otherwise create a new copy of the string in the collection         and reference the field to it

4) if the field is an array of char then:

-   -   a) if the new value does not fit, report array bounds error     -   b) otherwise copy the value into the array

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_AssignToField( ), could be provided in order to assign an arbitrary field within a collection element to a value expressed as a C string. If the target field is a C string of some type, this function behaves similarly to TC_SetCStringFieldValue( ) except that if the ‘kAppendStringValue’ option is set, the new string is appended to the existing field contents. In all other cases, the field value would preferably be expressed in a format compatible with TM_StringToBinary( ) for the field type concerned and is assigned.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetValue( ), which could be provided in order to get the value and type ID of a designated collection element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetTypeID( ), could be provided in order to return the type ID of a designated collection element. This function is only a convenience over TC_GetValue( ) in that the type is returned as a function return value (0 is returned if an error occurs)

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_HasValue( ), could be provided in order to determine if a given node in a collection has a value or not. Again, the function would return either a positive or negative indicator in response to such a request.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_RemoveValue( ), could be provided in order to remove the value (if any) from a collection node.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetFieldValue( ), could be provided in order to get the value of a field within the specified collection element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetCStringFieldValue( ), could be provided in order to get a C string field from a collection element into an existing buffer. In the preferred embodiment, if the field type is not appropriate for a C string, this function returns FALSE and the output buffer is empty. Preferably, if the field specified is actually some kind of reference to a C string, this function will automatically resolve the reference and return the reesolved string. In the case of a persistent (#) reference, this function would preferably return the name field or the contents of the string handle field if non-NULL. In the case of a collection (@@) reference, this function will preferably return the contents of the string handle field if non-NULL.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetFieldPersistentElement( ), could be provided in order to obtain the element designator corresponding to a persistent reference field. In the preferred embodiment of this function, if the field value has not yet been obtained, this function will invoke a script which causes the referenced value to be fetched from storage and inserted into the collection at the end of a list whose parent is named by the referenced type and is immediately below the root of the collection (treated as a set). Thus, if the referenced type is “Person”, then the value will be inserted below “Person” in the collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetFieldCollection( ), could be provided in order to obtain the collection offset corresponding to the root node of a collection reference. In the preferred embodiment, if the field collection value has not yet been obtained, this function will invoke a script for the field which causes the referenced values to be fetched from storage and inserted into the referencing collection as a seperate and distinct collection within the same collection handle. The collection and element reference of the root node of this collection is returned via the ‘collectionRef’ parameter.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetPersistentFieldDomain( ), could be provided in order to obtain the collection offset corresponding to the root node of a domain collection for a persistent reference field. If the field domain collection value has not yet been obtained, this function will invoke a script, such as the “$GetPersistentCollection” script, for the field which causes the referenced values to be fetched from storage and inserted into the referencing collection as a seperate and distinct collection within the same collection handle. The collection and element reference of the root node of this domain collection is returned via the ‘collectionRef’ parameter.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetFieldDirty( ), could be provided in order to mark the designated field of the collection element as either ‘dirty’ (i.e., changed) or clean. By default, all fields start out as being ‘clean’. In the preferred ambodiment, this function has no effect if a previous call to TC_InitDirtyFlags( ) has not been made in order to enable tracking of clean/dirty for the collection element concerned. Preferably, once a call to TC_InitDirtyFlags( ) has been made, subsequent calls to set the field value (e.g., TC_SetFieldValue) will automatically update the ‘dirty’ bit so that it in not necessary to call TC_SetFieldDirty( ) explicitly.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_IsFieldDirty( ), which could be provided in order to return the dirty/clean status of the specified field of a collection element. If dirty/clean tracking of the element has not been enabled using TC_InitDirtyFlags( ), this function returns FALSE.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_InitDirtyFlags( ), which could be provided in order to set up a designated collection element to track dirty/clean status of the fields within the element. By default, dirty/clean tracking of collection elements is turned off and a call to TC_IsFieldDirty( ) will return FALSE.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetFieldEmpty( ), which could be provided in order to mark the designated field of the collection element as either ‘empty’ (i.e., value undefined) or non-empty (i.e., value defined). By default all fields start out as being non-empty. In the preferred embodiment, this function has no effect if a previous call to TC_InitEmptyFlags( ) has not been made in order to enable tracking of defined/undefined values for the collection element concerned. Once a call to TC_InitEmptyFlags( ) has been made, subsequent calls to set the field value (e.g., TC_SetFieldValue) will automatically update the ‘empty’ bit so that it in not necessary to call TC_SetFieldEmpty( ) explicitly.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_EstablishEmptyDirtyState( ), which could be provided in order to calculate a valid initial empty/dirty settings for the fields of an element. In the preferred ambodiment, the calculation would be performed based on a comparison of the binary value of each field with 0. If the field's binary value is 0, then it is assummed the field is empty and not dirty. Otherwise, the field is assummed to be not empty and dirty. If the element already has empty/dirty tracking set up, this function simply returns without modifying anything.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_IsFieldEmpty( ), which could be provided in order to return the empty/full status of the specified field of a collection element. If empty/full tracking of the element has not been enabled using TC_InitEmptyFlags( ), this function will return FALSE.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetElementTag( ), could be provided in order to add, remove, or replace the existing tag associated with a field of a ‘valued’ element within a collection, or alternatively if ‘aFieldName’ is NULL, the tag is associated with the element itself. Unlike annotations and scripts (see the TypeScripts package) that are applied to the definitions of the type or field, tags are associated with node a collection, normally (but not necessarily) a valued node. Tags consist of arbitrary strings, much like annotations. There may be any number of different tags associated with a given record/field. In the preferred ambodiment, if the collection concerned is file or server-based, tags will persist from one run to the next and thus form a convenient method of arbitrarily annotating data stored in a collection without formally changing its structure. Tags may also be used extensively to store temporary data/state information associated with collections.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetElementTag( ), which could be provided in order to obtain the tag text associated with a given field within a ‘valued’ collection element. If the tag name cannot be matched, NULL is returned.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetElementNumericTag( ), which could be provided in order to add, remove, or replace the existing numeric tag associated with a field of a ‘valued’ element within a collection, or alternatively if ‘aFieldName’ is NULL, the tag is associated with the element itself (which may have no value). This would provide a shorthand method for accessing numeric tags and uses TC_SetElementTag( ). The ‘tagFormat’ value would preferably be one of the following predefined tag formats: ‘kTagIsInteger’, ‘kTagIsIntegerList’, ‘kTagIsReal’, or ‘kTagIsRealList’. In the case of integer tags, the elipses parameter(s) should be a series ‘valueCount’ 64-bit integers. In the case of real tags, the elipses parameter(s) should be a series of ‘valueCount’ doubles.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetElementTypedTag( ), which could be provided in order to add, remove, or replace the existing typed tag associated with a field of a ‘valued’ element within a collection, or alternatively if ‘aFieldName’ is NULL, the tag is associated with the element itself (which may have no value). This function provides a shorthand method for accessing typed tags and uses TC_SetElementTag( ). The tag format is set to ‘kTagIsTyped’. Preferably, the tag string itself consists of a line containing the type name followed by the type value expressed as a string using TM_BinaryToString ( . . . , kUnsignedAsHex+kCharArrayAsString).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetElementNumericTag( ), which could be provided in order to obtain the existing numeric tag associated with a field of a ‘valued’ element within a collection, or alternatively if ‘aFieldName’ is NULL, the tag is associated with the element itself (which may have no value). This provides a shorthand method for accessing numeric tags and uses TC_GetElementTag( ). The ‘tagFormat’ value would preferably be one of the following predefined tag formats: ‘kTagIsInteger’, ‘kTagIsIntegerList’, ‘kTagIsReal’, or ‘kTagIsRealList’. In the case of integer tags, the elipses parameter(s) would be a series ‘valueCount’ 64-bit integer addresses. In the case of real tags, the elispes parameter(s) would be a series of ‘valueCount’ double addresses.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetElementTypedTag( ), which could be provided in order to obtain the existing typed tag associated with a field of a ‘valued’ element within a collection, or alternatively if ‘aFieldName’ is NULL, the tag is associated with the element itself (which may have no value). This provides a shorthand method for accessing numeric tags and uses TC_GetElementTag( ).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetElementTagList( ), which could be provided in order to obtain a string handle containing an alphabetized list (one per line) of all element tags appearing in or below a given node within a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetAllElementTags( ), which could be provided in order to obtain a character handle containing all element tags associated with a specified element [and field] of a collection. This function may be used to optimize a series of calls to TC_GetElementTag( ) by passing ‘aCollection’ is NULL to TC_GetElementTag( ) and passing an additional ‘charHdl’ parameter that is the result of the TC_GetAllElementTags( ) call. This can make a significant difference in cases where a series of different tags need to be examined in succession.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_InitEmptyFlags( ), which could be provided in order to set up a designated collection element to track empty/full status of the fields within the element. By default, empty/full tracking of collection elements is turned off and a call to TC_IsFieldEmpty( ) will return FALSE if the field value is non-zero, the function will return TRUE otherwise.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_ShiftTail( ), which could be provided in order to make the designated element the new tail element of the collection and preferably disgards all elements that were after the designated element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_ShiftHead( ), which could be provided in order to make the designated element the new head element of the collection and preferably disgards all elements that were before the designated element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_RotTail( ), which could be provided in order to make the designated element the new tail element of the collection by rotating the collection without disgarding any other elements. The rotation operation is usually applied to ‘Ring’ structures.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_RotHead( ), which could be provided in order to make the designated element the new head element of the collection by rotating the collection without disgarding any other elements.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetName( ), which could be provided in order to assign a name to any member element of a collection. In the preferred embodiment, the element may subsequently be accessed using its name (which would preferably be unique). In essence, this is the basic operation of the ‘kFromSet’ collection, however, it can be applied and used for any of the other collection types. In the case of a tree element, the name specified would be the name of that node, however, to use the name to access the element using TC_SymbolicRef( ), it is preferable to specify the entire ‘path’ from the root node where each ancestor is seperated from the next by a ‘:’. Alternatively, the ‘kPathRelativeToParent’ option can be used to allow the use of partial relative paths. Preferably, names would consist of alphanumeric characters or the ‘_’ character only, and would be less than 31 characters long.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetName( ), which could be provided in order to return the name (if any) of the specified element of a collection. Note that in the case of a tree, the name would refer just to the local node. Preferably, to access the element symbolically, the path which can be obtained using TC_GetPath( ) would be used. The ‘aName’ buffer should be at least 32 characters long.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetPath( ), which could be provided in order to apply return the full symbolic path (if defined) from the root node to the specified element of a collection in a tree. Preferably, the ‘aPath’ buffer should be large enough to hold the entire path. The worst case can be calculated using TC_GetDepth( ) and multiplying by 32.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SymbolicRef( ), which could be provided in order to obtain a reference to a given element of a collection given its name (see TC_SetName) or in the case of a tree, its full path. Sometimes for certain collections it is more convenient (and often faster) to refer to elements by name rather than any inherent order that they might have. This is the central concept behind the ‘kFromSet’ collection, however, it may also be applied to any other collection type. An element could also be found via its relative path from some other non-root node in the collection using this call simply by specifying the ‘kPathRelativeToParent’ which causes ‘theParentRef’, not the collection root, to be treated as the starting point for the relative path ‘aName’.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Find( ), which could be provided in order to scan the collection in order by calling the searching function specified in the comparison function parameter. In the preferred embodiment, the comparision function is passed two references, the second is to a record of type ‘ET_ComplexSort’ which is identical to that used during the TC_Sort( ) call. The first reference would be to a ‘srchSpec’ parameter. The ‘srchSpec’ parameter may be the address of any arbitrary structure necessary to specify to the search function how it is to do its search. The ‘fromWhich’ field of the ‘ET_ComplexSort’ record will be non-zero if the call relates to a non-leaf node (for example in a tree). The ‘kRecursiveOperation’ applies for hierarchical collections. The role of the search function is similar to that of the sort function used for TC_Sort( ) calls, that is it returns a result that is above, below, or equal to zero based on comparing the information specified in the ‘srchSpec’ parameter with that in the ‘ET_ComplexSort’ parameter. By repeatedly calling this function, one can find all elements in the collection that match a specific condition. In the preferred embodiment, when the ‘kRecursiveOperation’ option is set, the hits will be returned for the entire tree below the parent node specified according to the the search order used internally by this function. Alternatively, the relevant node could be specified as the parent (not the root node) in order to restrict the search to some portion of a tree.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_FindByID( ), which could be provided in order to use the TC_Find( ) to locate a record within the designated portion of a collection having data whose unique ID field matches the value specified. This function could form the basis of database-like behavior for collections.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_FindByTag( ), which could be provided in order to make use of TC_Visit( ) to locate a record within (i.e., excluding the parent node) the designated-portion of a collection whose tag matches the value specified.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_FindNextMatchingFlags( ), which could be provided in order to make use of TC_Visit( ) to locate a record within (i.e., excluding the parent/root node) the designated portion of a collection whose flags values match the flag values specified.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_FindByTypeAndFieldMatch( ), which could be provided in order to make use of TC_Find( ) to locate a record(s) within the designated portion of a collection having data whose type ID matches ‘aTypeID’ and for which the ‘aFieldName’ value matches that referenced by ‘matchValue’. This is an optimized and specialized form of the general capability provided by TC_Search( ). Preferably, in the case of string fields, a “strcmpo” comparision is used rather than the full binary equality comparison “memcmpo” utilized for all other field types. For any more complex search purpose it is preferable to use TC_Search( ) directly. Persistent reference fields may also be compared by ID if possible or name otherwise. For Pointer, Handle, and Relative reference fields, the comparison is performed on the referenced value, not on the field itself. This approach makes it very easy to compare any single field type for an arbitrary condition without having to resort to more sophisticated use of TC_Find( ). In cases where more than one field of a type would preferably be examined to determine a match, particularly when the algorithm required may vary depending on the ontological type involved, the routine TC_FindByTypeAndRecordMatch( ) could be used.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_FindMatchingElements( ), which could be provided in order to make use of TC_Find( ) to locate a record(s) within the designated portion of a collection having data for which the various fields of the record can be used in a custom manner to determine if the two records refer to the same thing. This routine operates by invoking the script $ElementMatch when it finds potentially matching records, this script can be registered with the ontology and the algorithms involved may thus vary from one type to the next. This function may be used when trying to determine if two records relate to the same item, for example when comparing people one might take account of where they live, their age or any other field that can be used to discriminate including photographs if available. In the preferred embodiment, the operation of the system is predicated on the application code registering comparison scripts that can be invoked via this function. The comparison scripts for other types would necessarily be different.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetUniqueID( ), which could be provided in order to get the unique persistent ID value associated with the data of an element of a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetUniqueID( ), which could be provided in order to set the unique persistent ID value associated with the data of an element of a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetElementDestructor( ), which could be provided in order to set a destructor function to be called during collection tear-down for a given element in a collection. This function would preferably only be used if disposal of the element cannot be handled automatically via the type manager facilities. The destructor function is called before and built-in destructor actions, so if it disposes of memory associated with the element, it would preferably ensure that it alters the element value to reflect this fact so that the built-in destruction process does not duplicate its actions.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetElementDestructor( ), which could be provided in order to get an element's destructor function (if any).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetDepth( ), which could be provided in order to return the relative ancestry depth of two elements of a collection. That is if the specified element is an immediate child of the parent, its depth is 1, a grandchild (for trees) is 2 etc. If the element is not a child of the parent, zero is returned.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Prune( ), which could be provided in order to remove all children from a collection. Any handle storage associated with elements being removed would preferably be disposed.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_AddPath( ), which could be provided in order to add the specified path to a tree. In the preferred embodiment, a path is a series of ‘:’ seperated alphanumeric (plus ‘_’) names representing the nodes between the designated parent and the terminal node given. If the path ends in a ‘:’, the terminal node is a non-leaf node, otherwise it is assumed to be a leaf. For example the path “animals:mammals:dogs:fido” would create whatever tree structure was necessary to insert the non-leaf nodes for “animals”, “mammals” and “dogs” below the designated parent, and then insert the leaf node “fido” into “dogs”. Note that while the parent is normally the root of the tree, another existing non-leaf node of the tree may be specified along with a path relative to that node for the add.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Shove( ), which could be provided in order to add a new element at the start of the collection. When applied to a tree, a new head child node is added. When applied to a binary tree, it is preferablt to use TC_AddLeft( ).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Flip( ), which could be provided in order to reverse the order of all children of the specified parent. The ‘kRecursiveOperation’ option may also apply.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetFlags( ), which could be provided in order to set or clear one or more of the 16 custom flag values associated with each element of a collection. These flags are often useful for indicating logical conditions or states associated with the element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetFlags( ), which could be provided in order to get one or more custom flag values associated with each element of a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetReadOnly( ), which could be provided in order to alter the read-only state of a given element of a collection. If an element is read-only, any subsequent attempt to alter its value will fail.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_IsReadOnly( ), which could be provided in order to determine if a given element of a collection is marked as read-only or not. If an element is read-only, any attempt to alter its value will fail.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetTag( ), which could be provided in order to set the tag value associated with a given element. The tag value (which is a long value) may also be used to store any arbitrary information, including a reference to other storage. In the preferred embodiment, if the tag value represented other storage, it is important to define a cleanup routine for the collection that will be called as the element is destroyed in order to clean up the storage.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetTag( ), which could be provided in order to get the tag value associated with an element of a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetShortCut( ), which could be provided in order to set the shortcut value associated with a given element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_SetDescription( ), which could be provided in order to set the description string associated with a given element. The description may also be used to store any arbitrary text information.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetDescription( ), which could be provided in order to get the tag value associated with an element of a collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_CollType( ), which could be provided in order to obtain the collection type (e.g., kFromArray etc.) for a collection

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Visit( ), which could be provided in order to visit each element of a collection in turn. For non-hierarchical collections, this function would be a relatively simple operation. For trees, however, the sequence of nodes visited would need to be set using a variable, such as ‘postOrder’. In the preferred embodiment, if ‘postOrder’ is false, the tree is searched in pre-order sequence (visit the parent, then the children). If it is true, the search would be conducted in post-order sequence (visit the children, then the parent). At each stage in the ‘walk’, the previous value of ‘anElem’ could be used by the search to pick up where it left off. To start the ‘walk’, the variable ‘anElem’ could be set to zero. The ‘walk’ would terminate when this function returns FALSE and the value of anElem on output becomes zero. The advantage of using TC_Visit( ) for all collection scans, regardless of hierarchy, is that the same loop will work with hierarchical or non-hierarchical collections. Loops involving operations like TC_Next( ) do not in general exhibit this flexibility. If the ‘kRecursiveOperation’ option is not set, the specified layer of any tree collection will be traversed as if it was not hierarchical. This algorithm is fundamental to almost all other collection manipulations, and because it is non-trivial, it is further detailed below: Boolean TC_Visit ( // Visit each element of a collection     ET_CollectionHdl aCollection, // IO:The collection     int32 options, // I:Various logical options     ET_Offset theParentRef, // I:Parent element reference     ET_Offset* anElem, // IO:Previous element (or 0),next     Boolean postOrder // I:TRUE/FALSE = postOrder/preOrder  ) // R:TRUE for success, else FALSE {  off = *anElem;  prt = resolve parent reference  objT = root node ‘fromWhich'  if ( !off )  {   off = (prtP->childHdr) ? theParentRef + prtP->childHdr : 0;   if ( off )   {    cpxP = resolve off reference    if ( post && (options & kRecursiveOperation) )     while ( off && cpxP->childHdr ) // now dive down to any children     {      off = off + cpxP->childHdr;      cpxP = resolve off reference     }   }  } else  {   cpxP = resolve off reference   noskip = NO;   if ( post ) // post-order traversal   { // at the EOF so only if we're in    if ( !cpxP->nextElem && (options & kRecursiveOperation) )    { // a hierarchy may there be more     if ( objT == kFromBTree || objT == kFromNTree || objT == kFromArrayN )     {      if ( cpxP->hdr.parent )      {       off = off + cpxP->hdr.parent; // climb up next parent       cpxP = resolve off reference       if ( (cpxP != kComplexRecord || off == theParentRef ) )        off = 0;      } else       off = 0;      noskip = YES; // parents examined after children     } else      off = 0;    }    if ( off && !noskip )    {     off = ( cpxP->nextElem ) ? off + cpxP->nextElem : 0;     if ( off )     {      cpxP = resolve off reference      if ( options & kRecursiveOperation )       while ( off && cpxP->childHdr ) // depth 1st dive to children       {        off = off + cpxP->childHdr;        cpxP = resolve off reference       }     }    }   } else // pre-order traversal   {    if ( cpxP->childHdr && (options & kRecursiveOperation) )    {     off = off + cpxP->childHdr;     cpxP = resolve off reference    } else    {     if ( cpxP->nextElem )     {      off = off + cpxP->nextElem;      cpxP = resolve off reference     }     else if ( options & kRecursiveOperation )     {      if ( objT == kFromBTree || objT == kFromNTree || objT == kFromArrayN )       for ( ; off && !cpxP->nextElem ; )       {        if ( cpxP->hdr.parent )        {         off = off + cpxP->hdr.parent;         cpxP = resolve off reference        } else         off = 0;        if ( off && (record != kComplexRecord || off == theParentRef) )         off = 0;    }      else       off = 0;      if ( off && cpxP->nextElem )      {       off = off + cpxP->nextElem;       cpxP = resolve off reference      }     } else      off = 0;    }   }  } }

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Random( ), could be provided in order to randomize the order of all children of the specified parent. The ‘kRecursiveOperation’ option applies.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_HasEmptyFlags( ), could be provided in order to check to see if a designated collection element has tracking set up for empty/non-empty status of the fields within the element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_HasDirtyFlags( ), could be provided in order to check to see if a designated collection element has tracking set up for dirty/clean status of the fields within the element.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetSetDirtyFlags( ), could be provided in order to get/set the dirty flags for a given record. This copy might also be used to initialize the flags for another record known to have a similar value. To prevent automatic re-computation of the flags when cloning is intended (since this computation is expensive), it is preferable to use the ‘kNoEstablishFlags’ option when creating the new record to which the flags will be copied. The buffer supplied in ‘aFlagsBuffer’ would preferably be large enough to hold all the resulting flags. The size in bytes necessary can be computed as:

bytes=(((TM_GetTypeMaxFlagIndex( )−1)|0x07)+1)>>3;

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetSetEmptyFlags( ), could be provided in order to get/set the empty flags for a given record. For example, this copy might be used to initialize the flags for another record known to have a similar value. To prevent automatic re-computation of the flags in cases where such cloning is intended (since this computation Is expensive), it is preferably to use the ‘kNoEstablishFlags’ option when creating the new record to which the flags will be copied. The buffer supplied in ‘aFlagsBuffer’ would preferably be large enough to hold all the resulting flags. The size in bytes necessary can be computed as:

bytes=(((TM_GetTypeMaxFlagIndex( )−1)|0x07)+1)>>3;

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_GetServerCollections( ), could be provided in order to obtain a string handle containing an alphabetized series of lines, wherein each line gives the name of a ‘named’ collection associated with the server specified. These names could be used to open a server-based collection at the client that is tied to a particular named collection in the list (see, for example, TC_OpenContainer).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Publish( ), could be provided in order to publish all collections (wake function).

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_UnPublish( ), could be provided in order to un-publish a previously published collection at a specified server thus making it no-longer available for client access. In the preferred embodiment, un-publishing first causes all current subscribers to be un-subscribed. If this process fails, the un-publish process itself is aborted. Once un-published, the collection is removed from the server and any subsequent (erroneous) attempt to access it will fail.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Subscribe( ), could be provided in order to subscribe to a published collection at a specified server thus making accessible in the client. A similar effect could be achieved by using TC_CreateCollection( ) combined with the ‘kServerBasedCollection’ option.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_Unsubscribe( ), could be provided in order to un-subscribe from a published collection at a specified server. In the preferred embodiment, the collection itself does not go away in the server, un-subscribing merely removes the connection with the client.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_ContainsTypedef( ), could be provided in order to determine if a typedef for type name given is embedded in the collection. Because collections may be shared, and may contain types that are not known in other machines sharing the collection, such as proxy types that may have been created on the local machine, it is essential that the collection itself contain the necessary type definitions within it. In the preferred embodiment, this logic would be enforced automatically for any proxy type that is added into a collection. If a collection contains other dynamic types and may be shared, however, it is preferable to include the type definition in the collection.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_AddTypedef( ), could be provided in order to add/embed a typedef for type name in a collection. Because collections may be shared, and may contain types that are not known in other machines sharing the collection, such as proxy types that may have been created on the local machine, it is preferable for the collection itself to store the necessary type definitions within it. In the preferred embodiment, this logic would be enforced automatically for any proxy type that is added into a collection. If a collection contains other dynamic types and may be shared, however, is is preferably to ensure that the type definition is included in the collection by calling this function.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_BuildTreeFromStrings( ), could be provided in order to create a tree collection and a set of hierarchical non-valued named nodes from a series of strings formatted as for TC_AddPath( ), one per line of input text. The root node itself may not be named. If a collection is passed in, the new collection could attached to the specified node. Alternatively, an entirely new collection could be created and returned with the specified tree starting at the root.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_RegisterServerCollection( ), could be provided in order to register a collection by name within a server for subsequent non-local access via a server using server-based collections in the clients.

A function that may also be included in the API, hereinafter referred to as TC_DeRegisterServerCollection( ), could be provided in order to deregister a collection by name to prevent subsequent accesses via TC_ResolveServerCollection( ).

One feature that is important in any complete data model is the ability to associate and execute arbitrary code or interpreted script routines whenever certain logical actions are performed on the data of one of its fields. In the system of this invention, this capability is provided by the ‘scripts’ API (prefix TS_) a portion of which could be implemented as set forth below: Boolean TS_SetTypeAnnotation( // Modify annotation for a given type   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr name, // I:Annotation name “$anAnnotation”   charPtr annotation // I:Annotation, NULL to remove ); // R:TRUE for success, FALSE otherwise Boolean TS_SetFieldAnnotation( // Set field annotation text   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr aFieldName, // I:Name of the field/field path   charPtr name, // I:Annotation name as in “<on> $name”   charPtr anAnnotation, // I:Text of annotation, NULL to remove   ... // I: ‘fieldName’ could be sprintf( ) ); // R:TRUE for success, FALSE otherwise charHdl TS_GetTypeAnnotation( // Obtain annotation for a given type   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr name, // I:Annotation name as in “<on> $name”   int32 options, // I:Various logical options (see notes)   ET_ViewRef *collectionNode,// I:If non-NULL, collection node   ET_TypeID *fromWho // IO:holds registering type ID ); // R:Annotation text, NULL if none charHdl TS_GetFieldAnnotation( // Get annotation for a field   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr aFieldName, // I:Name of the field/field path   int32 options, // I:Various logical options (see notes)   ET_ViewRef *collectionNode,// I:If non-NULL, collection node   ET_TypeID *fromWho, // IO:holds registering type ID   charPtr name, // I:Annotation name as in “<on> $name”   ... // I:‘fieldName’ may be sprintf( ) ); // R:Annotation text, NULL if none #define kNoInheritance 0x01000000 // options - !inherit from ancest. types #define kNoRefInherit 0x02000000 // options - !inherit for ref. fields #define kNoNodeInherit 0x08000000 // options - !inherit from ancest. nodes charHdl TS_GetFieldScript ( // Get script for action & field   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr aFieldName, // I:Name of the field/field path   charPtr anAction, // I:Action name as in “<on> anAction”   int32 options, // I:Various logical options (see notes)   ET_ViewRef *collectionNode,// I:If non-NULL, collection node   ET_TypeID *fromWho, // IO:registering type ID   Boolean *isLocal, // IO:TRUE if local script,else false   ... // I:‘aFieldName’ may be sprintf( ) ); // R:Action script,NULL if none #define kGlobalDefnOnly 0x04000000 // options - only obtain global def. Boolean TS_SetTypeScript( // Set script for action & type   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr anAction, // I:Action name as in “<on> anAction”   charPtr aScript, // I:Type script/proc, NULL to remove   int32 options // I:Various logical options (see notes) ); // R:TRUE for success, FALSE otherwise #define kLocalDefnOnly 0x00000001 // options - local script override #define kProcNotScript 0x00000002 // options - ‘aScript’ is a fn. address Boolean TS_SetFieldScript( // Set field action script   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr aFieldName, // I:Name of the field/field path   charPtr anAction, // I:Selector name as in “<on> anAction”   charPtr aScript, // I:Field script/proc, NULL to remove   int32 options, // I:Various logical options (see notes)   ... // I:‘aFieldName’ may be sprintf( ) ); // R:TRUE for success, FALSE otherwise charHdl TS_GetTypeScript( // Get type script for action   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr anAction, // I:Action name as in “<on> anAction”   int32 options, // I:Various logical options (see notes)   ET_ViewRef *collectionNode,// I:If non-NULL, collection node   ET_TypeID *fromWho, // IO:registering type ID   Boolean *isLocal // IO:If non-NULL, set TRUE if local ); // R:Action script, NULL if none EngErr TS_InvokeScript ( // Invoke a type or field action script   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID aTypeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr aFieldName, // I:Name of the field/field path   charPtr anAction, // I:Action name as in “<on> anAction”   charPtr aScript, // I:type/field script,NULL to default   ET_TypeID fromWho, // I:Registering Type id, or 0   anonPtr aDataPtr, // I:Type data buffer, or NULL   ET_CollectionHdl aCollection, // I:The collection handle, or NULL   ET_Offset offset, // I:Collection element reference   int32 options, // I:Various logical options   ... // IO:Additional ‘anAction’ parameters ); // R:Zero for success, FALSE otherwise #define kSpecializedOptionsMask 0x0000FFFF // other bits are predefined #define kInternalizeResults 0x00010000 // options - value should be embedded Boolean TS_RegisterScriptFn( // register a script function   ET_TypeScriptFn aScriptFunction,// I:address of script function   charPtr aName // I:name of script function ); // R:TRUE for success, FALSE otherwise

Every type or type field may also have ‘action’ scripts (or procedures) associated with it. For example, certain actions could be predefined to equate to standard events in the environment. Actions may also be arbitrarily extended and used as subroutines within other scripts, however, in order to provide a rich environment for describing all aspects of the behavior of a type or any UI associated with it. Such an approach would allow the contents of the type to be manipulated without needing any prior knowledge of the type itself. Type and Field script procedures could have the following calling API, for example (ET_TypeScriptFn): EngErr myScript ( // my script procedure   ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default)   ET_TypeID typeID, // I:Type ID   charPtr fieldName, // I:Field name/path, NULL for type   charPtr action, // I:The script action being invoked   charPtr script, // I:The script text   anonPtr dataPtr, // I:Type data pointer or NULL   ET_CollectionHdl aCollection, // I:The collection handle, or NULL   ET_Offset offset, // I:Collection element reference   va_list ap // I:va_list to additional params. ) // R:0 for success, else Error number

In the case of a script, these parameters can be referred to using $action, $aTypeDBHdl, $typeID, $fieldName and $dataPtr, any additional parameters are referred to by their names as defined in the script itself (the ‘ap’ parameter is not accessible from a script). Preferably, Scripts or script functions would return zero if sucessful, an error number otherwise. In the case of a C function implementing the script, the “ap” parameter can be used to obtain additional parameter values using va_argo. A number of script actions may also be predefined by the environment to allow registration of behaviors for commonly occuring actions. A sample set of predefined action scripts are listed below (only additional parameters are shown), but many other more specialized scripts may also be used:

$GetPersistentRef(ET_PersistentRef *persistentRef) Resolve a persistent reference, once the required data has been loaded (e.g., from a database), the ‘memoryRef’ or ‘elementRef’ field should be set to reference the element designator obtained. This corresponds to resolving the ‘typeName #id’ persistent reference language construct. Note that if the ‘id’ field of the ET_PersistentRef is zero, the ‘name’ field will contain a string giving the name of the item required (presumably unique) which the function should then resolve to obtain and fill out the ‘id’ field, as well as the ‘memory/element Ref’ field. The contents of the ‘stringH’ field of ‘persistentRef’ may contain text extracted during data mining (or from other sources) and this may be useful in resolving the reference. The following options are defined for this script:

kInternalizeResults—the resultant value should be created within the referencing collection

kGetNameOnly—Just fetch the name of the reference NOT the actual value

$GetCollection(charPtr $filterSpec, charPtr fieldList, ET_CollectionRef *collectionRef) This script builds a type manager collection containing the appropriate elements given the parent type and field name. Once the collection has been built, the ‘collection’ field value of ‘collectionRef’ should be set equal to the collection handle (NULL if empty or problem creating it). This normally corresponds to resolving the ‘typeName @@collectionName’ collection reference language construct. The value of $filterSpec is obtained from the “$FilterSpec” annotation associated with the field (if any). Note also that the contents of the ‘stringH’ field of ‘collectionRef’ may also contain text extracted during data mining (or from other sources) and this may be useful in determining how to construct the collection. The value of the ‘fieldList’ parameter may be set to NULL in order to retrieve all fields of the elements fetched, otherwise it would preferably be a comma separated list of field names required in which case the resulting collection will be comprised of proxy types containing just the fields specified. The ‘kInternalizeResults’ option may apply to this script.

$GetPersistentCollection(charPtr $filterSpec, charPtr fieldList, ET_PersistentRef *persistentRef) This script/function is similar to “$GetCollection” but would be called only for persistent reference fields. The purpose of this script is to obtain a collection (into the ‘members’ field of the ET_PersistentRef) of the possible choices for the persistent reference. This can be seen in the UI when the field has a list selection menu next to it to allow setting of new values, clicking on this list selection will result in a call to this script in order to populate the resulting menu. “$filterSpec” and “fieldList” operate in a similar manner to that described for “$GetCollection”. The ‘kInternalizeResults’ option may apply to this script.

$InstantiatePersistentRef(ET_PersistentRef *persistentRef) This script is called in order to instantiate into persistent storage (if necessary) a record for the persistent reference passed which contains a name but no ID. The script should check for the existence of the named Datum and create it if not found. In either case the ID field of the persistent reference should be updated to contain the reference ID. The actions necessary to instantiate values into persistent storage vary from one data type to another and hence different scripts may be registered for each data type. The ‘stringH’ field of the persistent reference may also contain additional information specific to the fields of the storage to be created. The $SetPersRefInfo( ) function can be used during mining to append to this field. Any string assignement to a persistent reference field during mining results in setting the name sub-field. In the preferred embodiment, this script would clear the ‘stringH’ field after successful instantiation.

$InstantiateCollection(ET_CollectionRef *collectionRef) This script is called in order to instantiate into persistent storage (if necessary) all records implied by the collection field passed. The process is similar to that for “$InstantiatePersistentRef” but the script would preferably be aware of the existence of the ‘aStringH’ field of the collection reference with may contain a text based list of the implied record names. Any string assignment to a collection field during mining results in appending to the ‘stringH’ field. This field could also be explicitly set using the $SetPersRefInfo( ) function. In the preferred embodiment, this script would clear the ‘stringH’ field after successful instantiation.

$DefaultValue(charPtr defaultValue) This script/function allows the default value of a type field to be set. If the field has a “$DefaultValue” annotation this is passed as a parameter to the function, otherwise this parameter is null. In the absence of a “$DefaultValue” script, any “$DefaultValue” annotation found will be passed to TM_StringToBinary(delimiter=“\n”) which can be used to initialize fields, including structures to any particular value required. The assignment of default values preferably occurs within calls to TM_NewPtr( ), TM_NewHdl( ), or TM_InitMem( ) so type memory would also be allocated using one of these functions if default values are being used. If no default value is specified, the memory is initialized to zero. A field may also be explicitly set to its default value by calling TM_SetFieldToDefault( ).

$Add( ) This script/function is invoked to add a typed record to persistent storage (i.e, database(s)). In most cases the record being added will be within a collection that has been extracted during mining or which has been created manually via operator input.

$UniqueID( ) This script is called to assign (or obtain) the unique ID for a given record prior to adding/updating that record (by invoking $Add) to the database. The purpose of this script it to examine the name field (and any other available fields) of the record to see if a record of the same type and name exists in storage and if it does fill out the ID field of the record, otherwise obtain and fill out a new unique ID. Since the ID field preferably serves as the link between all storage containers in the local system, it is essential that this field is set up prior to any container specific adds and prior to making any $MakeLink script (described below) calls.

$MakeLink(ET_CollectionHdl refCollection,ET_Offset refElement,charPtr reffield) This script is called after $UniqueID and before $Add when processing data in a collection for addition/update to persistent storage. The purpose of this script is to set up whatever cross-referencing fields or hidden linkage table entries are necessary to make the link specified. If the referring field is a persistent reference, it will already have been set up to contain the ID and relative reference to the referred structure. If additional links are required (e.g., as implied by ‘echo’ fields), however, this script would be used to set them up prior the $Add being invoked for all Datums in the collection.

$SetFieldValue(anonPtr *newValue,long *context,int32 entry) This script could called whenever the value of a field is altered. Normally setting a field value requires no script in order to implement, however, if a script is specified, it will be called immediately prior to actually copying the new value over with the value of ‘entry’ set to true. This means that the script could change the ‘newValue’ contents (or even replace it with a alternate ‘newValue’ pointer) prior to the copy. After the copy is complete and if ‘context’ is non-zero, the script may be called again with ‘entry’ set to false which allows any context stored via ‘context’ to be cleaned up (including restoring the original ‘newValue’ if appropriate). Because of this copying mechanism, $SetFieldValue scripts would preferably not alter the field value in the collection, but rather the value that is found in ‘newValue’. This script is also a logical place to associate any user interface with the data underlying it so that updates to the UI occur automatically when the data is changed.

$Drag(ControlHandle aControlH,EventRecord *eventP,ET_DragRef *dragRef) This script is called to start a drag.

$Drop(ControlHandle aControlH,ET_DragRef dragRef) This script is called to perform a drop. The options parameter will have bit-0 set true if the call is for a prospective drop, false if the user has actually performed a drop by releasing the mouse button. A prospective drop occurs if the user hovers over a potential drop location, in this case a popup menu may be automatically displayed in order to allow the user to select one of a set of possible drop actions (for example, “copy link”, “insert icon” etc). This same menu may also be produced on an actual drop if it is not possible to determine automatically what action is required. The DragAndDrop implementation provides a set of API calls for constructing and handling the drop action menu,

$ElementMatch(ET_Offset element,Boolean *match) This script is called to compare two elements to see if they refer to the same item. See TC_FindMatchingElements( ) for details. Preferably, the Boolean result is returned in the ‘match’ field, true to indicate a match and false otherwise.

Annotations are arbitrarily formatted chunks of text (delimited as for scripts and element tags) that can be associated with fields or types in order to store information for later retreival from code or scripts. The present invention utilized certain predefined annotations (listed below) although additional (or fewer) annotations may also be defined as desired:

$filterSpec—This annotation (whose format is not necessarily currently defined by the environment itself) is passed to the $GetCollection and $GetPersistentCollection scripts in order to specify the parameters to be used when building the collection.

$tableSpec—This annotation (whose format is not necessarily currently defined by environment itself) is used when creating persistent type storage.

$DefaultValue—See the description under the $DefaultValue script.

$BitMask—This annotation may be used to define and then utilize bit masks associated with numeric types and numeric fields of structures. The format of the annotation determines the appearence in auto-generated UI. For full details, see the description for the function TM_GetTypeBitMaskAnnotation( ).

$ListSpec—In the preferred embodiment, this field annotation consists of a series of lines, each containing a field path within the target type for a collection reference. These field paths can be used to define the type and number of columns of a list control provided by the TypesUI API which will be used to display the collection in the UI. The elements of the $ListSpec list would preferably correspond to valid field paths in the target type.

A function, hereinafter called TS_SetTypeAnnotation( ), could be provided which adds, removes, or replaces the existing “on” condition annotation for a type. This routine may also be used to add additional annotations to or modify existing annotations of a type.

A function, hereinafter called TS_SetFieldAnnotation( ), could be provided which adds, removes, or replaces the existing annotation associated with a field. This routine may also be used to add additional annotations to or modify existing annotations of a type field. Preferably, annotations always apply globally. In such an embodiment, annotations could be divided into annotation types so that multiple independant annotations can be attached and retrieved from a given field.

A function, hereinafter called TS_GetTypeAnnotation( ), could be provided which obtains the annotation specified for the given type (if any). In the preferred embodiment, the following options are supported:

kNoInheritance—dont inherit from ancestral types etc.

kNoNodeInherit—dont inherit from ancestral nodes in the collection

A function, hereinafter called TS_GetFieldAnnotation( ), could be provided which obtains the annotation text associated with a given field and annotation type. If the annotation and annotation type cannot be matched, NULL is returned. In the preferred embodiment, options include:

kNoInheritance—dont inherit from ancestral types etc.

kNoNodeInherit—dont inherit from ancestral nodes in the collection

kNoRefInherit—dont inherit for reference fields

A function, hereinafter called TS_GetFieldScript( ), could be provided which obtains the script associated with a given field and action. If the script and action cannot be matched, NULL is returned. Preferably, the returned result would be suitable for input to the function TS_DoFieldActionScript( ). Note that field scripts may be overriden locally to the process using TS_SetFieldScript( ). If this is the case, the ‘isLocal’ parameter (if specified) will be set true. Local override scripts that wish to execute the global script and modify the behavior may also obtain the global script using this function with ‘globalDefnOnly’ set TRUE, and execute it using TS_DoFieldActionScript( ). If the script return actually corresponds to an action procedure not a script then the script contents will simply contain an ‘=’ character followed by a single hex number which is the address of the procedure to be called. This is also valid input to TS_DoFieldActionScript( ) which will invoke the procedure. If the ‘inherit’ parameter is TRUE, upon failing to find a script specific to the specified field, this function will attempt to find a script of the same name associated with the enclosing type (see TM_GetTypeActionScript) or any of its ancestors. This means that it is possible to specifiy default behaviors for all fields derived from a given type in one place only and then only override the default in the case of specific field where this is necessary. If the field is a reference field, a script is only invoked if it is directly applied to the field itself, all other script inheritance is suppressed. In the preferred embodiment, the following options would be supported:

kNoInheritance—dont inherit from ancestral types etc.

kNoNodeInherit—dont inherit from ancestral nodes in the collection

kNoRefInherit—dont inherit for reference fields

kGlobalDefnOnly—only obtain global definition, ignore local overrides

The search order when looking for field scripts is as follows:

1) Look for a field script associated with the field itself.

2) If ‘inherit’ is TRUE:

-   -   A) If ‘aFieldName’ is a path (e.g., field1.field2.field3), for         each and every ancestral field in turn (from the leaf node         upwards—2,1 in the example above):         -   a) If there is an explicit matching field script             (no-inheritance) associated with that field, use it     -   B) If the field is a ‘reference’ field (i.e., *, **, @, @@, or         #), search the referred to type for a matching type script     -   C) Search the enclosing type (‘aTypeID’) for a matching type         script.

A function, hereinafter called TS_SetTypeScript( ), could be procided which adds, removes, to or replaces the existing “on” condition action code within an existing type script. For example, this routine could be used to add additional behaviors to or modify existing behaviors of a type. In the preferred embodiment, if the ‘kLocalDefnOnly’ option is set, the new action script definition applies within the scope of the current process but does not in any way modify the global definition of the type script. The ability to locally override a type action script is very useful in modifying the behavior of certain portions of the UI associated with a type while leaving all other behaviors unchanged. If the ‘kProcNotScript’ option is set, ‘aScript’ is taken to be the address of a procedure to invoke when the script is triggered, rather than a type manager script. This approach allows arbitrary code functionality to be tied to types and type fields. While the use of scripts is more visible and flexible, for certain specialized behaviors, the use of procedures is more appropriate.

A function, hereinafter called TS_SetFieldScript( ), could be provided which adds, removes, or replaces the existing “on” condition action code within an existing field script. For example, this routine may be used to add additional behaviors to or modify existing behaviors of a type field. If the ‘kLocalDefnOnly’ option is set, the new action script definition applies within the scope of the current process, it does not in any way modify the global definition of the field's script. As explained above, this ability to locally override a field action script is very useful in modifying the behavior of certain portions of the UI associated with a field while leaving all other behaviors unchanged. If the ‘kProcNotScript’ option is set, ‘aScript’ is taken to be the name of a script function to invoke when the script is triggered, rather than an actual type manager script. This allows arbitrary code functionality to be tied to types and type fields. Script functions can be registered using TS_RegisterScriptFn( ).

A function, hereinafter called TS_GetTypeScript( ), could be provided which obtains the script associated with a given type and action. If the type and action cannot be matched, NULL is returned. Preferably, the returned result would be suitable for input to the function TS_DoTypeActionScript( ). Note that in the preferred ambodiment type scripts may be overriden locally to the process using TS_SetTypeScript( ). If this is the case, the ‘isLocal’ parameter (if specified) will be set true. Local override scripts that wish to execute the global script and modify the behavior somehow can obtain the global script using this function with ‘kGlobalDefnOnly’ option set, and execute it using TS_DoTypeActionScript( ). If the script return actually corresponds to an action procedure not a script then the script contents will simply contain an ‘=’character followed by a single hex number which is the address of the procedure to be called. This is also valid input to TS_DoTypeActionScript( ) which will invoke the procedure. If the ‘kNoInheritance’ option is not set, upon failing to find a script specific to the type, this function will attempt to find a script of the same name associated with the enclosing type or any of its ancestors. Using this function, it is possible to specifiy default behaviors for all types (and fields—see TM_GetFieldActionScript) derived from a given type in one place only and then only override the default in the case of specific type/field where this is necessary. Options for this function are identical as described with respect to the function TS_GetFieldScript( ).

A function, hereinafter called TS_InvokeScript( ), could be provided which invokes the specified field action script or script function. Note that because the ‘fieldScript’ parameter is explicitly passed to this function, it is possible to execute arbitrary scripts on a field even if those scripts are not the script actually associated with the field (as returned by TS_GetFieldScript). This capability makes the full power of the type scripting language available to program code whilst allowing arbitrary script or script function extensions as desired. Unlike most field related functions in this API, this function does not necessarily support sprintf( ) type field expansion because the variable arguments are used to pass parameters to the scripts. When invoking a type action script without knowledge of the field involved, the ‘aFieldName’ parameter should be set to NULL.

A function, hereinafter called function TS_RegisterScriptFn( ), could also be provided which could be used to to register a script function symbolically so that it can be invoked if encountered within a field or type script. In the preferred embodiment, when TS_InvokeFieldActionScript( ) encounters a script beginning with an ‘=’ character and of the form “=scriptFnName” where “scriptFnName” has been registered previously using this procedure, it resolves “scriptFnName” to obtain the actual function address and then invokes the function.

The foregoing description of the preferred embodiments of the invention has been presented for the purposes of illustration and description. For example, although described with respect to the C programming language, any programming language could be used to implement this invention. Additionally, the claimed system and method should not be limited to the particular API disclosed. The descriptions of the header structures should also not be limited to the embodiments described. While the sample pseudo code provides examples of the code that may be used, the plurality of implementations that could in fact be developed is nearly limitless. For these reasons, this description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teaching. It is intended that the scope of the invention be limited not by this detailed description, but rather by the claims appended hereto.

APPENDIX 6 SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF SOFTWARE PROGRAMS Inventor: John Fairweather BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

In any complex information system that accepts unstructured or semi-structured input (such as an intelligence system) for the external work, it is obvious that change is the norm, not the exception. Media and data streams are often modified and otherwise constantly change making it difficult to monitor them. Moreover, in any system involving multiple users with divergent requirements, even the data models and requirements of the system itself will be subject to continuous and pervasive change. By some estimates, more than 90% of the cost and time spent on software is devoted to maintenance and upgrade of the installed system to handle the inevitability of change. Even our most advanced techniques for software design and implementation fail miserably as the system is scaled or is otherwise changed. The reasons for this failure arise, at least in part, from the very nature of accepted software development practice/process.

Referring now to FIG. 1, the root of the problem with the current software development process, which we shall call the “Software Bermuda Triangle” effect, is shown. Conventional programming wisdom holds that during the design phase of an information processing application, programming teams should be split into three basic groups. The first group is labeled DBA (for Database Administrator) 105. These individuals 105 are experts in database design, optimization, and administration. This group 105 is tasked with defining the database tables, indexes, structures, and querying interfaces based initially on requirements, and later, on requests primarily from the applications group. These individuals 105 are highly trained in database techniques and tend naturally to pull the design in this direction, as illustrated by the small outward pointing arrow. The second group is the Graphical User Interface (GUI) group 110. The GUI group 110 is tasked with implementing a user interface to the system that operates according the customer's expectations and wishes and yet complies exactly with the structure of the underlying data (provided by the DBA group 105) and the application(s) behavior (as provided by the Apps group 115). The GUI group 110 will have a natural tendency to pull the design in the direction of richer and more elaborate user interfaces. Finally the applications group 115 is tasked with implementing the actual functionality required of the system by interfacing with both the DBA and the GUI and related Applications Programming Interfaces (APIs). This group 115, like the others 105,110 tends to pull things in the direction or more elaborate system specific logic. Each of these groups tends to have no more than a passing understanding of the issues and needs of the other groups. Thus during the initial design phase, assuming a strong project and software management process rigidly enforces design procedures, a relatively stable triangle is formed where the strong connections 120, 125, 130 enforced between each group by management are able to overcome the outward pull of each member of the triangle. Assuming a stable and unchanging set of requirements, such a process stands a good chance of delivering a system to the customer on time.

The problem, however, is that while correct operation has been achieved by each of the three groups 110, 105, 115 in the original development team, significant amounts of undocumented application, GUI, and Database specific knowledge has likely been embedded into all three of the major software components. In other words, this process often produces a volatile system comprised of these subtle and largely undocumented relationships just waiting to be triggered. After delivery (the bulk of the software life cycle), in the face of the inevitable changes forced on the system by the passage of time, the modified system begins to break down to yield a new “triangle” 150. Unfortunately, in many cases, the original team that built the system has disbanded and knowledge of the hidden dependencies is gone. Furthermore, system management is now in a monitoring mode only meaning that instead of having a rigid framework, each component of the system is now more likely to “drift”. This drift is graphically represented by the dotted lines 155, 160, 165. During maintenance and upgrade phases, each change hits primarily one or two of the three groups. Time pressures, and the new development environment, mean that the individual tasked with the change (probably not an original team member) tends to be unaware of the constraints and naturally pulls outward in his particular direction. The binding forces have now become much weaker and more elastic while the forces pulling outwards have become much stronger. A steady supply of such changes impacting this system could well eventually break it apart. In such a scenario, the system will grind to a halt or become unworkable or un-modifiable. The customer must either continue to pay progressively more and more outrageous maintenance costs (swamping the original development costs), or must start again from scratch with a new system and repeat the cycle. The latter approach is often much cheaper than the former. This effect is central to why software systems are so expensive. Since change of all kinds is particularly pervasive in an intelligence system, any architecture for such systems would preferably address a way to eliminate this “Bermuda Triangle” effect.

Since application specific logic and it's implementation cannot be eliminated, what is needed is a system and environment in which the ‘data’ within the system can be defined and manipulated in terms of a world model or Ontology, and for which the DBA and GUI portions of the programming tasks can be specified and automatically generated from this Ontology thereby eliminating the triangle effect (and the need for the associated programming disciplines). Such an approach would make the resultant system robust and adaptive to change.

SUMMARY OF INVENTION

The present invention provides a system capable of overcoming this effect and provides a system that is both robust and adaptive to change. The preferred base language upon which this system is built is the C programming language although other languages may be used. In the standard embodiment using the C programing language, the present invention is composed of the following components:

-   -   a) Extensions to the language that describe and abstract the         logic associated with interacting with external ‘persistent’         storage (i.e., non-memory based). Standard programming languages         do not provide syntax or operators for manipulating persistent         storage and a formalization of this capability is desirable.         This invention provides these extensions and the “extended”         language is henceforth referred to as C*. C*, in addition to         being a standard programming language, is also an ontology         definition language (ODL).     -   b) Extensions to the C* language to handle type inheritance. In         an ontology based system, the world with which the system         interacts is broken down based on the kinds of things that make         up that world, and by knowledge of the kind of thing involved,         it becomes possible to perform meaningful calculations on that         object without knowledge of the particulars of the descendant         type. Type inheritance in this context therefore more accurately         means ancestral field inheritance (as will be described later).     -   c) Extensions to the C* language to allow specification of the         GUI content and layout.     -   d) Extensions to the C* language to allow specification and         inheritance of scriptable actions on a per-field and per-type         basis. Similar extensions to allow arbitrary annotations         associated with types and fields are also provided.     -   e) A means whereby the data described in the C* language can be         translated automatically into generating the corresponding         tables and fields in external databases and the queries and         actions necessary to access those databases and read/write to         them. This aspect of the invention enables dynamic creation of         databases as data is encountered     -   f) A high level ontology designed to facilitate operation of the         particular application being developed. In the examples below         and in the preferred embodiment, the application being developed         will address the problem of ‘intelligence’ i.e., the         understanding of ‘events’ happening in the world in terms of the         entities involved, their motives, and the disparate information         sources from which reports are obtained.     -   g) A means to tie types and their access into a suite of         federated type or container/engine specific servers responsible         for the actual persistence of the data.

A necessary prerequisite for tackling the triangle problem is the existence of a run-time accessible (and modifiable) types system capable of describing arbitrarily complex binary structures and the references between them. In the preferred embodiment, the invention uses the system has been previously described in Appendix 1 (hereinafter, the “Types Patent”). Another prerequisite is a system for instantiating, accessing and sharing aggregates of such typed data within a standardized flat memory model and for associating inheritable executable and/or interpreted script actions with any and all types and fields within such data. In the preferred embodiment, the present invention uses the system and method that is described in Appendix 2 (hereinafter, the “Memory Patent”). The material presented in these two patents are expressly incorporated herein. Additional improvements and extensions to this system will also be described below and many more will be obvious to those skilled in the art.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 shows the root of the problem with the current software development process, which we shall call the “Software Bermuda Triangle” effect.

FIG. 2 shows a sample query-building user interface (UI).

FIG. 3 shows a sample user interface providing access to the fields within the type “country.”

FIG. 4 shows a sample user interface providing access to a free format text field within the type “country.”

FIG. 5 shows a sample user interface providing access to a fixed sized text field within the type “country.”

FIG. 6A shows an example of how a short text field or numeric field (such as those handled by the RDBMS container described above) might be displayed in a control group.

FIG. 6B shows one method for displaying a date in a control group.

FIG. 6C shows an example of an Islamic Hijjrah calendar being displayed.

FIG. 7A shows the illustrated control group of how one might display and interact with a persistent reference field (‘#’).

FIG. 7B shows an example of one way that a collection reference field (‘@@’) might be displayed in an auto-generated user interface.

FIG. 8 shows one possible method for displaying variable sized text fields (referenced via the char @ construct).

FIG. 9 shows the manner in which an image reference (Picture @picture) field could be displayed in an auto-generated user interface.

FIG. 10 shows a sample screen shot of one possible display of the Country record in the same UI layout theme described above (most data omitted).

FIG. 11 shows a sample embodiment of the geography page within Country.

FIG. 12 shows a sample embodiment of the second sub-page of the geography page within country.

FIG. 13 shows an example of one part of a high-level ontology targeted at intelligence is shown.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

As described above, a necessary prerequisite for tackling the triangle problem is the existence of a run-time accessible (and modifiable) types system capable of describing arbitrarily complex binary structures and the references between them. In the preferred embodiment, the invention uses the system described in the Types Patent. Another prerequisite is a system for instantiating, accessing and sharing aggregates of such typed data within a standardized flat memory model and for associating inheritable executable and/or interpreted script actions with any and all types and fields within such data. In the preferred embodiment, the present invention uses the system and method that is described in the Memory Patent. The material presented in these two patents are expressly incorporated herein and the functions and features of these two systems will be assumed for the purposes of this invention.

As an initial matter, it is important to understand some of the langauge extentions that are needed in order to create an Ontology Description Language (ODL). In the preferred embodiment, the following operators/symbols are added to the basic C language (although other symbols and syntax are obviously possible without changing the basic nature of the approach) in order to provide basic support for the items described herein:

script—used to associate a script with a type or field

annotation—used to associate an annotation with a type or field

@—relative reference designator (like ‘*’ for a pointer)

@@—collection reference designator

#—persistent reference designator

<on>—script and annotation block start delimiter

<no>—script and annotation block end delimiter

><—echo field specification operator—

:—type inheritance

Additionally, the syntax for a C type definition has been extended to include specification of the “key data-type” associated with a given ontological type as follows:

typedef struct X′XXXX′ { . . . };

Where the character constant ‘XXXX’ specifies the associated key data-type. The persistent reference designator ‘#’ implies a singular reference to an item of a named type held in external storage. Such an item can be referenced either by name or by unique system-wide ID and given this information, the underlying substrate is responsible for obtaining the actual data referenced, adding it to the collection, and making the connection between the referencing field and the newly inserted data by means of a relative reference embedded within the persistent reference structure. Preferably, the binary representation of a persistent reference field is acomplished using a structure of type ‘ET_PersistentRef’ as defined below: typedef struct ET_UniqueID {  OSType system; // system id is 32 bits  unsInt64 id; // local id is 64 bits } ET_UniqueID; typedef struct ET_PersistentRef {  ET_CollectionHdl members; // member collection  charHdl stringH; // String containing mined text  ET_TypeID aTypeID; // type ID  ET_Offset elementRef; // rel. ref. to data (NULL if !fetched)  ET_Offset memberRef; // rel. ref. to member coll. (or NULL)  anonPtr memoryRef; // pointer to type data (NULL if N/A)  ET_UniqueID id; // unique ID  char name[kPersRefNameSize]; // name of reference } ET_PersistentRef, *ET_PersistentRefPtr;

The type ET_UniqueID consists of a two part 96-bit reference where the 64-bit ‘id’ field refers to the unique ID within the local ‘system’ which would normally be a single logical installation such as for a particular corporation or organization. Multiple systems can exchange data and reference between each other by use of the 32-bit ‘system’ field of the unique ID. The ‘members’ field of an ET_PersistentRef is used by the system to instantiate a collection of the possible items to which the reference is being made and this is utilized in the user interface to allow the user to pick from a list of possibilities. Thus for example if the persistent reference were “Country #nationality” then the member collection if retrieved would be filled with the names of all possible countries from which the user could pick one which would then result in filling in the additional fields required to finalize the persistent reference.

In normal operation, either the name or ID and type is known initially and this is sufficient to determine the actual item in persistent storage that is being referenced which can then be fetched, instantiated in the collection and then referenced using the ‘elementRef’ field. The contents of the ‘stringH’ field are used during data mining to contain additional informating relating to resolving the reference. The ‘aTypeID’ field initially takes on the same value as the field type ID from which the reference is being made, however, once the matching item has been found, a more specific type ID may be assigned to this field. For example if the referencing field were of the form “Entity #owner” (a reference to an owning entity which might be a person, organization, country etc.) then after resolution, the ‘aTypeID’ field would be altered to reflect the actual sub-type of entity, in this case the actual owning entity. The ‘memoryRef’ field might contain a heap data reference to the actual value of the referenced object in cases where the referenced value is not to become part of the containing collection for some reason. Normally however, this field is not needed.

As an example of how the process of generating and then resolving a persistent reference operates, imagine the system has just received a news story referring to an individual who's name is “X”, additionally from context saved during the mining process, the system may know such things as where “X” lives and this information could be stored in the ‘stringH’ field. At the time the reference to “X” is instantiated into persistent storage, a search is made for a person named “X” and, should multiple people called “X” be found in the database, the information in ‘stringH’ would be used in a type dependant manner to prune the list down to the actual “X” that is being referenced. At this point the system-wide ID for the specific individual “X” is known (as is whatever else the system knows about X) and thus the ‘id’ field of the reference can be filled out and the current data for “X” returned and referenced via “elementRef”. If no existing match for “X” is found, a new “Person” record for “X” is created and the unique ID assigned to that record is returned. Thus it can be seen that, unlike a memory reference in a conventional programming language, a persistent reference may go through type specific resolution processes before it can be fully resolved. This need for a ‘resolution’ phase is characteristic of all references to persistent storage.

Like a persistent reference, the collection reference ‘@@’ involves a number of steps during instantiation and retrieval. In the preferred embodiment, a collection reference is physically (and to the C* user transparently) mediated via the ‘ET_CollectionRef’ type as set forth below: typedef struct ET_CollectionRef {  ET_CollectionHdl collection; // member collection  charHdl stringH; // String containing mined text  ET_TypeID aTypeID; // collection type ID (if any)  ET_Offset elementRef; // relative reference to collection root  ET_StringList cList; // collection member list (used for UI) } ET_CollectionRef, *ET_CollectionRefPtr;

The first four fields of this structure have identical types and purposes to those of the ET_PersistentRef structure, the only difference being that the ‘collection’ field in this structure references the complete set of actual items that form part of the collection. The ‘cList’ field is used internally for user interface purposes. The means whereby the collections associated with a particular reference can be distinguished from those relating to other similar references is related to the meaning and use of the ‘echo field’ operator ‘><’. The following extracts from an actual ontology based on this system serve to reveal the relationship between the ‘><’ operator and persistent storage references: typedef struct Datum ‘DTUM’ // Ancestral type of all pers. storage {  NumericID hostID; // unique Host system ID (0=local)  unsInt64 id; // unique ID  char name[256]; // full name of this Datum  char datumType[32]; // the type of the datum  NumericID securityLevel; // security level  char updatedBy[30]; // person updating/creating this Datum  Date dateEntered; // date first entered  Date dateUpdated; // date of last update  Feed #source; // information source for this Datum  Language #language; // language for this Datum record  struct  {   NoteRegarding @@notes >< regarding; // Notes regarding this Datum   NoteRelating @@relatedTo >< related; // Items X-referencing this Datum   NoteRelating @@relatedFrom >< regarding;// Items X-referencing this Datum   GroupRelation @@relatedToGroup >< related;// Groups X-referencing this Datum   GroupRelation @@relatedFromGroup >< regarding;// Groups X- referencing Datum   Delta @@history >< regarding; // Time history of changes to Datum   Category @@membership; // Groupings Datum is a member of   char @sourceNotes; // notes information source(s)   unsInt64 sourceIDref; // ID reference in original source  } notes;  Symbology #symbology; // symbology used  Place #place; // ‘where’ for the datum (if known) } Datum , *DatumPtr; typedef struct NoteRelating:Observation ‘CXRF’ // Relationship between two datums {  Datum  #regarding >< notes.relatedFrom; // ‘source’ item  char itemType[64]; // Datum type for regarding item  Datum  #related >< notes.relatedTo; // ‘target’ item  char relatedType[64]; // Datum type for related item  RelationType #relationType; // The type of the relationship  Percent relevance; // strength of relationship (1..100)  char author[128]; // Author of the StickIt Relating note  char title[256]; // Full Title of StickIt Relating note  char @text; // descriptive text and notes } NoteRelating;

In the preferred embodiment, ‘Datum’ is the root type of all persistent types. That is, every other type in the ontology is directly or indirectly derived from Datum and thus inherits all of the fields of Datum. The type ‘NoteRelating’ (a child type of Observation) is the ancestral type of all notes (imagine them as stick-it notes) that pertain to any other datum. Thus an author using the system may at any time create a note with his observations and opinions regarding any other item/datum held in the system. The act of creating such a note causes the relationships between the note and the datum to which it pertains to be written to and persisted in external storage. As can be seen, every datum in the system contains within its ‘notes’ field a sub-field called ‘relatedFrom’ declared as “NoteRelating @@relatedFrom >< regarding”. This is interpreted by the system as stating that for any datum, there is a collection of items of type ‘NoteRelating’ (or a derived type) for which the ‘regarding’ field of each ‘NoteRelating’ item is a persistent reference to the particular Datum involved. Within each such ‘NoteRelating’ item there is a field ‘relating’ which contains a reference to some other datum that is the original item that is related to the Datum in question. Thus the ‘NoteRelating’ type is serving in this context as a bi-directional link relating any two items in the system as well as associating with that relationship a ‘direction’, a relevance or strength, and additional information (held in the @text field which can be used to give an arbitrary textual description of the exact details of the relationship). Put another way, in order to discover all elements in the ‘relatedFrom’ collection for a given datum, all that is necessary is to query storage/database for all ‘NoteRelating’ items having a ‘regarding’ field which contains a reference to the Datum involved. All of this information is directly contained within the type definition of the item itself and thus no external knowledge is required to make connections between disparate data items. The syntax of the C* declaration for the field, therefore, provides details about exactly how to construct and execute a query to the storage container(s)/database that will retrieve the items required. Understanding the expressive power of this syntax is key to understanding how it is possible via this methodology to eliminate the need for a conventional database administrator and/or database group to be involved in the construction and maintenance of any system built on this methodology.

As can be seen above, the ‘regarding’ field of the ‘NoteRelating’ type has the reverse ‘echo’ field, i.e., “Datum #regarding ><notes.relatedFrom;”. This indicates that the reference is to any Datum or derived type (i.e., anything in the ontology) and that the “notes.relatedFrom” collection for the referenced datum should be expected to contain a reference to the NoteRelating record itself. Again, it is clear how, without any need for conventional database considerations, it is possible for the system itself to perform all necessary actions to add, reference, and query any given ‘NoteRelating’ record and the items it references. For example, the ‘notes.relatedTo’ field of any datum can reference a collection of items that the current datum has been determined to be related to. This is the other end of the ‘regarding’ link discussed above. As the type definitions above illustrate, each datum in the present invention can be richly cross referenced from a number of different types (or derivatives). More of these relationship types are discussed further herein.

For the purposes of illustrating how this syntax might translate into a concrete system for handling references and queries, it will assumed in the discussion below that the actual physical storage of the data occurs in a conventional relational database. It is important to understand, however, that nothing in this approach is predicated on or implies, the need for a relational database. Indeed, relational databases are poorly suited to the needs of the kinds of system to which the technology discussed is targeted and are not utilized in the preferred embodiment. All translation of the syntax discussed herein occurs via registered script functions (as discussed further in the Collections Patent) and thus there is no need to hard code this system to any particular data storage model so that the system can be customized to any data container or federation of such containers. For clarity of description, however, the concepts of relational database management systems (RDBMS) and how they work will be used herein for illustration purposes.

Before going into the details of the behavior of RDBMS plug-in functions, it is worth examining how the initial connection is made between these RDBMS algorithms and functions and this invention. As mentioned previously, this connection is preferably established by registering a number of logical functions at the data-model level and also at the level of each specific member of the federated data container set. The following provides a sample set of function prototypes that could apply for the various registration processes: Boolean DB_SpecifyCallBack ( // Specify a persistent storage callback short  aFuncSelector,  // I:Selector for the logical function ProcPtr aCallBackFn // I:Address of the callback function )  // R:TRUE for success, FALSE otherwise #define kFnFillCollection  1 // ET_FillCollectionFn - // Fn. to fill collection with data for a given a hit list #define kFnFetchRecords  2 // ET_FetchRecordsFn - // Fn. to query storage and fetch matching records to colln. #define kFnGetNextUniqueID  3 // ET_GetUniqueIdFn - // Fn. to get next unique ID from local persistent storage #define kFnStoreParsedDatums  4 // ET_StoreParsedDatumsFn - // Fn. to store all extracted data in a collection #define kFnWriteCollection  5 // ET_WriteCollectionFn - // Fn. to store all extracted data in a collection #define kFnDoesIdExist  6 // ET_DoesIdExistFn - // Fn. to determine if a given ID exists in persistent storage #define kFnRegisterID  7 // ET_RegisterIDFn - // Fn. to register an ID to persistent storage #define kFnRemoveID  8 // ET_RemoveIDFn - // Fn. to remove a given ID from the ID/Type registery #define kFnFetchRecordToColl  9 // ET_FetchRecordToCollFn - // Fn. Fetch a given persistent storage item into a colln. #define kFnFetchField  10 // ET_FetchFieldFn - // Fn. Fetch a single field from a single persistent record #define kFnApplyChanges  11 // ET_ApplyChangesFn - // Fn. to apply changes #define kFnCancelChanges  12 // ET_CancelChangesFn - // Fn. to cancel changes #define kFnCountTypeItems  13 // ET_CountItemsFn - // Fn. to count items for a type (and descendant types) #define kFnFetchToElements  14 // ET_FetchToElementsFn - // Fn. to fetch values into a specified set of elements/nodes #define kFnRcrsvHitListQuery  15 // ET_RcrsvHitListQueryFn - // Fn. create a hit list from a type and it's descendants #define kFnGetNextValidID  16 // ET_GetNextValidIDFn - // Fn. to find next valid ID of a type after a given ID Boolean DB_DefineContainer (  // Defines a federated container charPtr   name   // I: Name of container );   // R: Error code (0 = no error) Boolean DB_DefinePluginFunction(  // Defines container plugin fn. charPtr   name,   // I: Name of container int32   functionType,  // I: Which function type ProcPtr  functionAddress // I: The address of the function );   // R: Void #define kCreateTypeStorageFunc 29 // Create storage for a container #define kInsertElementsFunc 30  // insert container data #define kUpdateRecordsFromElementsFunc 31  // update container from data #define kDeleteElementsFunc 32  // delete elements from container #define kFetchRecordsToElementsFunc 33  // fetch container data #define kInsertCollectionRecordFunc 34  // insert container data to elements #define kUpdateCollectionRecordFunc 35  // update collection from container #define kDeleteCollectionRecordFunc 36  // delete collection record #define kFetchRecordsToCollectionFunc 37  // fetch container record to colln. #define kCheckFieldType 38  // determine if field is container's

In this embodiment, whenever the environment wishes to perform any of the logical actions indicated by the comments above, it invokes the function(s) that have been registered using the function DB_SpecifyCallBack( ) to handle the logic required. This is the first and most basic step in disassociating the details of a particular implementation from the necessary logic. At the level of specific members of a federated collection of storage and querying containers, another similar API allows container specific logical functions to be registered for each container type that is itself registered as part of the federation. So for example, if one of the registered containers were a relational database system, it would not only register a ‘kCreateTypeStorageFunc’ function (which would be responsible for creating all storage tables etc. in that container that are necessary to handle the types defined in the ontology given) but also a variety of other functions. The constants for some of the more relevant plug-ins at the container level are given above. For example, the ‘kCheckFieldType’ plug-in could be called by the environment in order to determine which container in the federation will be responsible for the storage and retrieval of any given field in the type hierarchy. If we assume a very simple federation consisting of just two containers, a relational database, and an inverted text search engine, then we could imagine that the implementation of the ‘kCheckFieldType’ function for these two would be something like that given below: // Inverted file text engine: Boolean DTX_CheckFieldType ( // Field belongs to ‘TEXT” ?       ET_TypeID   aTypeID, // I: Type ID       charPtr   fieldname // I: Field name ) // R: Error code (0 = no error) {  ET_TypeID fType,baseType;  int32 rType;  Boolean ret;  fType = TM_GetFieldTypeID(NULL, aTypeID, fieldName);  ret = NO;  if ( TM_TypeIsReference(NULL, fType, &rType, &baseType) && baseType == kInt8Type &&      (rType == kPointerRef || rType == kHandleRef || rType == kRelativeRef) )   ret = YES;  return ret; } // Relational database: Boolean DSQ_CheckFieldType ( // Field belongs to ‘RDBM’ ?       ET_TypeID   aTypeID, // I: Type ID       charPtr   fieldname // I: Field name ) // R: Error code (0 = no error) {  ET_TypeID fType, baseT;  int32 refT;  Boolean ret;  fType = TM_GetFieldTypeID(NULL, aTypeID, fieldname);  ref = TM_TypeIsReference(NULL,fType,&refT,&baseT);  ret = NO;  if ( ref && refT == kPersistentRef ) // We'll handle pers. Refs.   ret = YES;  else if ( !ref && ( // We do:   TM_IsTypeDescendant(NULL, fType, kInt8Type) || // char arrays,   fType == TM_GetTypeID(NULL, “Date”) || // Dates,   TM_IsTypeDescendant(NULL, fType, kIntegerNumbersType)  || // Integers and   TM_IsTypeDescendant(NULL,fType,kRealNumbersType) ) ) // Floating point #'s   ret = YES;  return ret; }

As the pseudo-code above illustrates, in this particular federation, the inverted text engine lays claim to all fields that are references (normally ‘@’) to character strings (but not fixed sized arrays of char) while the relational container lays claim to pretty much everything else including fixed (i.e., small sized) character arrays. This is just one possible division of responsibility is such a federation, and many others are possible. Other containers that may be members of such federations include video servers, image servers, map engines, etc. and thus a much more complex division of labor between the various fields of any given type will occur in practice. This ability to abstract away the various containers that form part of the persistent storage federation, while unifying and automating access to them, is a key benefit of the system of this invention.

Returning to the specifics of an RDBMS federation member, the logic associated with the ‘kCreateTypeStorageFunc’ plug-in for such a container (assuming an SQL database engine such as Oracle) might look similar to that given below: static EngErr DSQ_CreateTypeStorage( // Build SQL tables ET_TypeID   theType // I: The type ) // R: Error Code (0 = no error) {   char sqlStatement[256], filter[256];   err = DSQ_CruiseTypeHierarchy(theType,DSQ_CreateTypeTable);   sprintf(filter, // does linkage table exist?     “owner=(select username from all_users where user_id=uid) and”     “table_name=‘LINKAGE_TABLES$’”);   if (#records found(“all_tables”, filter)) // If not, then create it!   {    sprintf(sqlStatement, “create table LINKAGE_TABLES$      (DYN_NAME varchar2(50),ACT_NAME varchar2(50)) tablespace data”);    err = SQL_ExecuteStatement(0, sqlStatement, NULL, 0, NULL);   }   err = DSQ_CruiseTypeHierarchy(theType, DSQ_CreateLinkageTables);   ... any other logic required   return (err); }

In this example, the function DSQ_CruiseTypeHierarchy( ) simply recursively walks the type hierarchy beginning with the type given down and calls the function specified. The function DSQ_CreateTypeTable( ) simply translates the name of the type (obtained from TM_GetTypeName) into the corresponding Oracle table name (possibly after adjusting the name to comply with constraints on Oracle table names) and then loops through all of the fields in the type determining if they belong to the RDBMS container and if so generates the corresponding table for the field (again after possible name adjustment). The function DSQ_CreateLinkageTables( ) creates anonymous linkage tables (based on field names involved) to handle the case where a field of the type is a collection reference, and the reference is to a field in another type that is also a collection reference echoing back to the original field. After this function has been run for all types in the ontology, it is clear that the external relational database now contains all tables and linkage tables necessary to implement any storage, retrieval and querying that may be implied by the ontology. Other registered plug-in functions for the RDBMS container such as query functions can utilize knowledge of the types hierarchy in combination with knowledge of the algorithm used by DSQ_CreateTypeStorage( ), such as knowledge of the name adjustment strategy, to reference and query any information automatically based on type.

Note that some of the reference fields in the example above do not contain a ‘><’ operator which implies that the ontology definer does not wish to have the necessary linking tables appear in the ontology. An example of such a field (as set forth above) is “Category @@membership”. This field can be used to create an anonymous linkage table based on the type being referenced and the field name doing the referencing (after name adjustment). The linkage table would contain two references giving the type and ID of the objects being linked. When querying such an anonymous table, the plug-ins can deduce its existence entirely from the type information (and knowledge of the table creation algorithm) and thus the same querying power can be obtained even without the explicit definition of the linking table (as in the example above). Queries from the C* level are not possible directly on the fields of such a linkage table because it does not appear in the ontology, however, this technique is preferably used when such queries would not necessarily make sense.

By using this simple expedient, a system is provided in which external RDBMS storage is created automatically from the ontology itself, and for which subsequent access and querying can be handled automatically based on knowledge of the type hierarchy. This has effectively eliminated the need for a SQL database administrator or database programming staff. Since the same approach can be adopted for every container that is a member of the federation, these same capabilities can be accomplished simultaneously for all containers in the federation. As a result, the creator of a system based on this technology can effectively ignore the whole database issue once the necessary container plug-ins have been defined and registered. This is an incredibly powerful capability, and allows the system to adapt in an automated manner to changes in ontology without the need to consider database impact, thus greatly increasing system flexibility and robustness to change. Indeed, whole new systems based on this technology can be created from scratch in a matter of hours, a capability has been up until now unheard of. Various other plug-in functions may also be implemented, which can be readily deduced from this description.

The process of assigning (or determining) the unique ID associated with instantiating a persistent reference resulting from mining a datum from an external source (invoked via the $UniqueID script as further described in the Collections Patent) deserves further examination since it is highly dependant on the type of the data involved and because it further illustrates the systems ability to deal with such real-world quirks. In the simple federation described above, the implementation of the $UniqueID script for Datum (from which all other types will by default inherit) might be similar to that given below: static EngErr PTS_AssignUniqueID( // $UniqueID script registered with Datum ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default) ET_TypeID typeID, // I:Type ID charPtr fieldName, // I:Field name/path (else NULL) charPtr action, // I:The script action being invoked charPtr script, // I:The script text anonPtr dataPtr, // I:Type data pointer ET_CollectionHdl aCollection,// I:The collection handle ET_Offset offset, // I:Collection element reference int32 options, // I:Various logical options ET_TypeID fromWho, // I:Type ID, 0 for field or unknown va_list ap // I:va_list for additional parameters     ) // R:0 for success, else error # {  ET_UniqueID   uniqueID;  TC_GetUniqueID(aCollection,0,offset,&uniqueID);  TC_GetCStringFieldValue(aCollection,0,0,offset,name,sizeof(name),“name”) ;  elemTypeID = TC_GetTypeID(aCollection,0,offset);  TM_BreakUniqueID(uniqueID,&localID,&sys);  if ( localID ) return 0; // we've already got an ID,we're done!  scrubbedStrPtr = mangle name according to SQL name mangling algorithm  force scrubbedStrPtr to upper case  sprintf(filterText, kStartQueryBlock kRelationalDB “:upper(name) = ‘%s’” kEndQueryBlock, scrubbedStrPtr); // Create the filter criteria  hitList = construct hit list of matches  count = # hits in hitList; // how many hits did we get  // Should issue a warning or dialog if more than one hit here  if (hitList && hitList[0]._id)  {   uniqueID = TM_MakeUniqueID(hitList[0]._id,hitList[0]._system);   existingElemTypeID = hitList[0]._type;   exists = TRUE;  }  if (!uniqueID.id)   uniqueID = TM_MakeUniqueID(DB_GetNextLocalUniqueID( ),0);  if (!TC_HasDirtyFlags(aCollection, 0, 0, offset))   call TC_EstablishEmptyDirtyState(aCollection,0,0,offset,NO) )  TC_SetUniqueID(aCollection,0,offset,uniqueID);// set the id  return err; }

This is a simple algorithm and merely queries the external RDBMS to determine if an item of the same name already exists and if so uses it, otherwise it creates a new ID and uses that. Suppose that the item involved is of type “Place”. In this case, it would be helpful to be more careful when determining the unique ID because place names (such as cities) can be repeated all over the world (indeed there may be multiple cities or towns with the same within any given country). In this case, a more specific $UniqueID script could be registered with the type Place (the ancestral type of all places such as cities, towns, villages etc.) that might appear more like the algorithm given below: static EngErr PTS_AssignPlaceUniqueID( // $UniqueID script registered with Place ET_TypeDBHdl aTypeDBHdl, // I:Type DB handle (NULL to default) ET_TypeID typeID, // I:Type ID charPtr fieldName, // I:Field name/path (else NULL) charPtr action, // I:The script action being invoked charPtr script, // I:The script text anonPtr dataPtr, // I:Type data pointer ET_CollectionHdl aCollection,// I:The collection handle ET_Offset offset, // I:Collection element reference int32 options, // I:Various logical options ET_TypeID fromWho, // I:Type ID, 0 for field or unknown va_list ap // I:va_list for additional parameters     ) // R:0 for success, else error # {  ET_UniqueID   uniqueID;  TC_GetUniqueID(aCollection,0,offset,&uniqueID);  TC_GetCStringFieldValue(aCollection,0,0,offset,name,sizeof(name),“name”) ;  TC_GetCStringFieldValue(aCollection,0,0,offset,thisPlace,128,“placeType” );  TC_GetFieldValue(aCollection,0,0,offset,&thisLon,“location.longitude”);  TC_GetFieldValue(aCollection,0,0,offset,&thisLat,“location.latitude”);  elemTypeID = TC_GetTypeID(aCollection,0,offset);  pT = TM_IsTypeProxy(elemTypeID);  if ( pT ) elemTypeID = pT;  TM_BreakUniqueID(uniqueID,&localID,NULL);  if ( localID ) return 0; // we've already got an ID,we're done!  scrubbedStrPtr = mangle name according to SQL name mangling algorithm  force scrubbedStrPtr to upper case  sprintf(filterText, kStartQueryBlock kRelationalDB “:upper(name) = ‘%s’” kEndQueryBlock, scrubbedStrPtr);  sprintf(fieldList, “placeType,location,country”);  tmpCollection = fetch all matching items to a collection  TC_Count(tmpCollection,kValuedNodesOnly,rootElem,&count);  // if we got one or more we need further study to see if it is in fact this place  // a place is unique if the place type, latitude and longitude are the same  placeTypeId = TM_KeyTypeToTypeID(‘PLCE’,NULL);  pplaceTypeId = TM_KeyTypeToTypeID(‘POPP’,NULL);  if (count)  {   anElem =0;   while (tmpCollection && TC_Visit(tmpCollection,kRecursiveoperation +                 kValuedNodesOnly,0,&anElem,false))   {    if ( TM_TypesAreCompatible(NULL, TC_GetTypeID( tmpCollection, 0, anElem)     ,pplaceTypeId) && TM_TypesAreCompatible(NULL,elemTypeID,pplaceTypeId) )    { // both populated places, check country     TC_GetFieldValue(tmpCollection,0,0,anElem,&prf1,“country”);     TC_GetFieldValue(aCollection,0,0,offset,&prf2,“country”);     if (strcmp(prf1.name,prf2.name) ) // different country!      continue;  TC_GetCStringFieldValue(tmpCollection,0,0,anElem,&placeType,128,“placeType”);     if (!strcmp(thisPlace,placeType)) // same type     {      if ( TC_IsFieldEmpty(tmpCollection,0,0,anElem,“location.longitude”) )      { // this is the same place!       TC_GetUniqueID(tmpCollection,0,anElem,&uniqueID);       TM_BreakUniqueID(uniqueID,&localID,NULL);       existingElemTypeID = TC_GetTypeID(tmpCollection,0,anElem);       exists = (existingElemTypeID != 0);       break;      } else      {       TC_GetFieldValue(tmpCollection, 0, 0, anElem, &longitude, “location.longitude”);       if (ABS(thisLon − longitude) < 0.01)       { // at similar longitude        TC_GetFieldValue(tmpCollection, 0,0, anElem, &latitude, “location.latitude”);        if (ABS(thisLat − latitude) < 0.01)        { // and similar latitude!         TC_GetUniqueID(tmpCollection,0,anElem,&uniqueID);         TM_BreakUniqueID(uniqueID,&localID,NULL);         existingElemTypeID = TC_GetTypeID(tmpCollection,0,anElem);         exists = (existingElemTypeID != 0);         break;        }       }      }     }    }   }  }  if ( !localID )   uniqueID = TM_MakeUniqueID(DB_GetNextLocalUniqueID( ),0);  else   uniqueID = TM_MakeUniqueID(localID,0);  if (!TC_HasDirtyFlags(aCollection, 0, 0, offset))   call TC_EstablishEmptyDirtyState(aCollection,0,0,offset,NO) )  TC_SetUniqueID(aCollection,0,offset,uniqueID);// set the id  return err; }

This more sophisticated algorithm for determining place unique IDs attempts to compare the country fields of the Place with known places of the same name. If this does not distinguish the places, the algorithm then compares the place type, latitude and longitude, to further discriminate. Obviously many other strategies are possible and completely customizable within this framework and this example is provided for illustration purposes only. The algorithm for a person name, for example, would be completely different, perhaps based on age, address, employer and many other factors.

It is clear from the discussion above that a query-building interface can be constructed that through knowledge of the types hierarchy (ontology) alone, together with registration of the necessary plug-ins by the various containers, can generate the UI portions necessary to express the queries that are supported by that plug-in. A generic query-building interface, therefore, need only list the fields of the type selected for query and, once a given field is chosen as part of a query, it can display the UI necessary to specify the query. Thereafter, using plug-in functions, the query-building interface can generate the necessary query in the native language of the container involved for that field.

Referring now to FIG. 2, a sample query-building user interface (UI) is shown. In this sample, the user is in the process of choosing the ontological type that he wishes to query. Note that the top few levels of one possible ontological hierarchy 210, 215, 220 are visible in the menus as the user makes his selection. A sample ontology is discussed in more detail below. The UI shown is one of many possibly querying interfaces and indeed is not that used in the preferred embodiment but has been chosen because it clearly illustrates the connections between containers and queries.

Referring now to FIG. 3, a sample user interface providing access to the fields within the type “country” is shown. Having selected Country from the query-building UI illustrated in FIG. 2, the user may then chose any of the fields of the type country 310 on which he wishes to query. In this example, the user has picked the field ‘dateEntered’ 320 which is a field that was inherited by Country from the base persistent type Datum. Once the field 320 has been selected, the querying interface can determine which member of the container federation is responsible for handling that field (not shown). Through registered plug-in functions, the querying language can determine the querying operations supported for that type. In this case, since the field is a date (which, in this example, is handled by the RDBMS container), the querying environment can determine that the available query operations 330 are those appropriate to a date.

Referring now to FIG. 4, a sample user interface providing access to a free format text field within the type “country” is shown. In this figure, the user has chosen a field supported by the inverted text file container. Specifically, the field “notes.sourceNotes” has been chosen (which again is inherited from Datum) and thus the available querying operators 410 (as registered by the text container) are those that are more appropriate to querying a free format text field.

Referring now to FIG. 5, a sample user interface providing access to a fixed sized text field within the type “country” is shown. In this figure, the user has chosen the field “geography.landAreaUnits” 510, which is a fixed sized text field of Country. Again, in the above illustration, this field is supported by the RDBMS container so the UI displays the querying operations 520 normally associated with text queries in a relational database.

The above discussion illustrated how container specific storage could be created from the ontology, how to query and retrieve data from individual containers in the federation, and how the user interface and the queries themselves can be generated directly from the ontology specification without requiring custom code (other than an application independent set of container plug-ins). The other aspects necessary to create a completely abstracted federated container environment relate to three issues: 1) how to distribute queries between the containers, 2) how to determine what queries are possible, and 3) how to reassemble query results returned from individual containers back into a complete record within a collection as defined by the ontology. The portion of the system of this invention that relates to defining individual containers, the querying languages that are native to them, and how to construct (both in UI terms and in functional terms) correct and meaningful queries to be sent to these containers, is hereinafter known as MitoQuest™. The portion of the system that relates to distributing (federating) queries to various containers and combining the results from those containers into a single unified whole, is hereinafter known as MitoPlex™. The federated querying system of this invention thus adopts a two-layer approach: the lower layer (MitoQuest™) relates to container specific querying, the upper layer (MitoPlex™) relates to distributing queries between containers and re-combining the results returned by them. Each will be described further below (in addition to the patent application referenced herein).

Each container, as a result of a container specify query, constructs and returns a hit-list of results that indicate exactly which items match the container specific query given. Hit lists are zero terminated lists that, in this example, are constructed from the type ET_Hit, which is defined as follows: typedef struct ET_Hit // list of query hits returned by a server {  OSType _system;  // system tag  unsInt64 _id;  // local unique item ID  ET_TypeID _type;  // type ID  int32 _relevance;   // relevance value 0..100 } ET_Hit;

As can be seen, an individual hit specifies not only the globally unique ID of the item that matched, but also the specific type involved and the relevance of the hit to the query. The specific type involved may be a descendant of the type queried since any query applied to a type is automatically applied to all its descendants since the descendants “inherit” every field of the type specified and thus can support the query given. In this embodiment, relevance is encoded as an integer number between 0 and 100 (i.e., a percentage) and its computation is a container specific matter. For example, this could be calculated by plug-in functions within the server(s) associated with the container. It should be noted that the type ET_Hit is also the parent type of all proxy types (as further discussed in the Types Patent) meaning that all proxy types contain sufficient information to obtain the full set of item data if required.

When constructing a multi-container query in MitoPlex™, the individual results (hit lists) are combined and re-assembled via the standard logical operators as follows:

-   -   AND—For a hit to be valid, it must occur in the hit list for the         container specific query occurring before the AND operator and         also in the hit list for the container specific query that         follows the AND.     -   OR—For a hit to be valid, it must occur in either the hit list         before the operator, or the one after the operator (or both).     -   AND THEN—This operator has the same net effect as the AND         operator but the hit-list from before the operator is passed to         the container executing the query that follows the operator         along with the query itself. This allows the second container to         locally perform any pruning implied by the hit list passed         before returning its results. This operator therefore allows         control over the order of execution of queries and allows         explicit optimization of performance based on anticipated         results. For example if one specified a mixed container query of         the form “[RDBMS:date is today] AND THEN [TEXT:text contains         “military”]” it is clear that the final query can be performed         far quicker than the effect of performing the two queries         separately and then recombining the results since the first         query pre-prunes the results to only those occurring on a single         day and since the system may contain millions of distinct items         where the text contains “military”. For obvious reasons, this         approach is considerably more efficient.     -   AND {THEN} NOT—This operator implies that to remain valid, a hit         must occur in the hit-list for the query specified before the         operator but not in the hit-list for the query after the         operator.

Additional logical operators allow one to specify the maximum number of hits to be returned, the required relevance for a hit to be considered, and many other parameters could also be formulated. As can be seen, the basic operations involved in the query combination process involve logical pruning operations between hit lists resulting from MitoQuest™ queries. Some of the functions provided to support these processes may be exported via a public API as follows: Boolean DB_NextMatchInHitList ( // Obtain the next match in a hit list ET_Hit*  aMatchValue, // I:Hit value to match ET_HitList  *aHitList, // IO:Pointer into hit list int32  options // I: options as for DB_PruneHitList( ) ); // R:TRUE if match found,else FALSE Boolean DB_BelongsInHitList ( // Should hit be added to a hit list? ET_Hit*  aHit, // I:Candidate hit ET_HitList  aPruneList, // I:Pruning hit list, zero ID term. int32  options // I:pruning options word ); // R:TRUE to add hit, FALSE otherwise ET_HitList DB_PruneHitList ( // prunes two hit lists ET_HitList  aHitList, // I:Input hit list, zero ID terminated ET_HitList  aPruneList, // I:Pruning hit list, zero ID term. int32  options, // I:pruning options word int32  maxHits // I:Maximum # hits to return (or 0) ); // R:Resultant hit list, 0 ID term.

In the code above, the function DB_NextMatchInHitList( ) would return the next match according to specified sorting criteria within the hit list given. The matching options are identical to those for DB_PruneHitList( ). The function DB_BelongsInHitList( ) can be used to determine if a given candidate hit should be added to a hit list being built up according to the specified pruning options. This function may be used in cases where the search engine returns partial hit sets in order to avoid creating unnecessarily large hit lists only to have them later pruned. The function DB_PruneHitList( ) can be used to prune/combine two hit lists according to the specified pruning options. Note that by exchanging the list that is passed as the first parameter and the list that is passed as the second parameter, it is possible to obtain all possible behaviors implied by legal combinations of the MitoPlex™ AND, OR, and NOT operators. Either or both input hit lists may be NULL which means that this routine can be used to simply limit the maximum number of hits in a hit list or alternatively to simply sort it. In the preferred embodiment, the following pruning options are provided:

kLimitToPruneList—limit returned hits to those in prune list (same as MitoPlex™ AND)

kExclusiveOfPruneList—remove prune list from ‘hits’ found (same as MitoPlex™ AND NOT)

kCombineWithPruneList—add the two hit lists together (default—same as MitoPlex™ OR)

The following options can be used to control sorting of the resultant hit list:

kSortByTypeID—sort resultant hit list by type ID

kSortByUniqueID—sort resultant hit list by unique ID

kSortByRelevance—sort resultant hit list by relevance

kSortInIncreasingOrder—Sort in increasing order

In addition to performing these logical operations on hit lists, MitoPlex™ supports the specification of registered named MitoQuest™ functions in place of explicit MitoQuest™ queries. For example, if the container on one side of an operator indicates that it can execute the named function on the other side, then the MitoPlex™ layer, instead of separately launching the named function and then combining results, can pass it to the container involved in the other query so that it may be evaluated locally. The use of these ‘server-based’ multi-container queries is extremely useful in tuning system performance. In the preferred embodiment of the system based on this invention, virtually all containers can locally support interpretation of any query designed for every other container (since they are all implemented on the same substrate) and thus all queries can be executed in parallel with maximum efficiency and with pruning occurring in-line within the container query process. This approach completely eliminates any overhead from the federation process. Further details of this technique are discussed in related patent applications that have been incorporated herein.

It is clear from the discussion above that the distribution of compound multi-container queries to the members of the container federation is a relatively simple process of identifying the containers involved and launching each of the queries in parallel to the server(s) that will execute it. Another optimization approach taken by the MitoPlex™ layer is to identify whether two distinct MitoQuest™ queries involved in a full MitoPlex™ query relate to the same container. In such a case, the system identifies the logic connecting the results from each of these queries (via the AND, OR, NOT etc. operators that connect them) and then attempts to re-formulate the query into another form that allows the logical combinations to instead be performed at each container. In the preferred embodiment, the system performs this step by combining the separate queries for that container into a single larger query combined by a container supplied logical operator. The hit-list combination logic in the MitoPlex™ layer is then altered to reflect the logical re-arrangements that have occurred. Once again, all this behavior is possible by abstract logic in the MitoPlex™ layer that has no specific dependency on any given registered container but is simply able to perform these manipulations by virtue of the plug-in functions registered for each container. These registered plug-in functions inform the MitoPlex™ and MitoQuest™ layers what functionality the container can support and how to invoke it. This approach is therefore completely open-ended and customizable to any set of containers and the functionality they support. Examples of other container functionality might be an image server that supports such querying behaviors as ‘looks like’, a sound/speech server with querying operations such as ‘sounds like’, a map server with standard GIS operations, etc. All of these can be integrated and queried in a coordinated manner through the system described herein.

The next issue to address is the manner in which the present invention auto-generates and handles the user interface necessary to display and interact with the information defined in the ontology. At the lowest level, all compound structures eventually resolve into a set of simple building-block types that are supported by the underlying machine architecture. The same is true of any type defined as part of an ontology and so the first requirement for auto-generating user interface based on ontological specifications is a GUI framework with a set of ‘controls’ that can be used to represent the various low level building blocks. This is not difficult to achieve with any modern GUI framework. The following images and descriptive text illustrate just one possible set of such basic building blocks and how they map to the low level type utilized within the ontology:

Referring now to FIG. 6A, an example of how a short text field or numeric field (such as those handled by the RDBMS container described above) might be displayed in a control group.

Referring now to FIG. 6B, one method for displaying a date in a control group is shown. In this Figure, the date is actually being shown in a control that is capable of displaying dates in multiple calendar systems. For example, the circle shown on the control could be displayed in yellow to indicate the current calendar is Gregorian. Referring now to FIG. 6C, an example of an Islamic Hijjrah calendar being displayed is provided. The UI layout can be chosen to include the calendar display option, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 7A, the illustrated control group is an example of how one might display and interact with a persistent reference field (‘#’). The text portion 705 of the grouping displays the name field of the reference, in this case ‘InsuregencyAndTerrorism’, while the list icon 710 allows the user to pop up a menu of the available values (see the ‘members’ field discussion under ET_PersistentRef above), and the jagged arrow icon 715 allows the user to immediately navigate to (hyperlink to) the item being referenced.

Referring now to FIG. 7B, 7B provides an example of one way that a collection reference field (‘@@’) might be displayed in an auto-generated user interface. In this case the field involved is the ‘related’ field within the notes field of Datum. Note also that the collection in this case is hierarchical and that the data has been organized and can be navigated according to the ontology.

Referring now to FIG. 8, one possible method for displaying variable sized text fields (referenced via the char @ construct) is shown. Note that in this example, automatic UI hyperlink generation has been turned on and thus any known item within the text (in this case the names of the countries) is automatically hyperlinked and can be used for navigation simply by clicking on it (illustrated as an underline). This hyperlinking capability will be discussed further in later patents but the display for that capability may be implemented in any number of ways, including the manner in which hyperlinks are displayed by web browsers.

Referring now to FIG. 9, this figure illustrates the manner in which an image reference (Picture @picture) field could be displayed in an auto-generated user interface.

Many other basic building blocks are possible and each can of course be registered with the system via plug-ins in a manner very similar to that described above. In all cases, the human-readable label associated with the control group is generated automatically from the field name with which the control group is associated by use of the function TM_CleanFieldName( ) described in the Types Patent. Because the system code that is generating and handling the user interface in this manner has full knowledge of the type being displayed and can access the data associated with all fields within using the APIs described previously, it is clear how it is also possible to automatically generate a user interface that is capable of displaying and allowing data entry of all types and fields defined in the ontology. The only drawback is the fact that user interfaces laid out in this manner may not always look ‘professional’ because more information is required in order to group and arrange the layout of the various elements in a way that makes sense to the user and is organized logically. The system of this invention overcomes this limitation by extracting the necessary additional information from the ontological type definition itself. To illustrate this behavior, a listing is provided in Appendix A that gives the pseudo-code ontological type definition for the type Country (which inherits from Entity and thereby from Datum described above) in the example ontology.

As can be seem from the listing above, the ontology creator has chosen to break down the many fields of information available for a country into a set of introductory fields followed by number of top-level sub-structures as follows:

geography—Information relating to the country's geography

people—Information relating to the country's people

government—Information relating to the country's government

economy—Information about the country's economy

communications—Information on communications capabilities

transport—Transport related information

military—Information about the country's military forces

medical—Medical information

education—Education related information

issues—Current and past issues for the country involved

Because the code that generates the UI has access to this information, it can match the logical grouping made in the ontology.

Referring now to FIG. 10, a sample screen shot of one possible display of the Country record in the same UI layout theme described above (most data omitted) is provided. In the illustrated layout the first page of the country display shows the initial fields given for country in addition to the basic fields inherited from the outermost level of the Datum definition. The user is in the process of pulling down the ‘page’ navigation menu 1020 which has been dynamically built to match the ontology definition for Country given above. In addition, this menu contains entries 1010 for the notes sub-field within Datum (the ancestral type) as well as entries for the fields 1030 that country inherits from its other ancestral types. In the first page, the UI layout algorithm in this example has organized the fields as two columns in order to make best use of the space available given the fields to be displayed. Since UI layout is registered with the environment, it is possible to have many different layout strategies and appearances (known as themes) and these things are configurable for each user according to user preferences.

Referring now to FIG. 11, a sample embodiment of the geography page within Country is shown. Presumably, the user has reached this page using the page navigation menu 1020 described above. In this case, the UI does not have sufficient space to display all fields of geography on a single page, so for this theme it has chosen to provide numbered page navigation buttons 1110, 11120, 1130 to allow the user to select the remaining portions of the geography structure content. Once again, different themes can use different strategies to handle this issue. The theme actually being shown in this example is a Macintosh OS-9 appearance and the layout algorithms associated with this theme are relatively primitive compared to others.

Referring now to FIG. 12, a sample embodiment of the second sub-page of the geography page within country is shown. As shown, the natural resources collection field 1210 is displayed as a navigable list within which the user may immediately navigate to the item displayed simply by double-clicking on the relevant list row. More advanced themes in the system of this invention take additional measures to make better use of the available space and to improve the appearance of the user interface. For example, the size of the fields used to display variable sized text may be adjusted so that the fields are just large enough to hold the amount of text present for any given record. This avoids the large areas of white space that can be seen in FIG. 12 and gives the appearance of a custom UI for each and every record displayed. As the window itself is resized, the UI layout is re-computed dynamically and a new appearance is established on-the-fly to make best use of the new window dimensions. Other tactics include varying the number of columns on each page depending on the information to be displayed, packing small numeric fields two to a column, use of disclosure tabs compact content and have it pop-up as the mouse moves over the tab concerned, etc. The possibilities are limited only by the imagination of the person registering the plug-ins. To achieve this flexibility, the UI layout essentially treats each field to be displayed as a variable sized rectangle that through a standard interface can negotiate to change size, move position or re-group itself within the UI. The code of the UI layout module allows all the UI components to compete for available UI space with the result being the final layout for a given ontological item. Clearly the matter of handling user entry into fields and its updating to persistent storage is relatively straightforward given the complete knowledge of the field context and the environment that is available in this system.

Referring now to FIG. 13, an example of one part of a high-level ontology targeted at intelligence is shown. This ontology has been chosen to facilitate the extraction of meaning from world events; it does not necessarily correspond to any functional, physical or logical breakdown chosen for other purposes. This is only an example and in no way is such ontology mandated by the system of this invention. Indeed, the very ability of the system to dynamically adapt to any user-defined ontology is one of the key benefits of the present invention. The example is given only to put some of the concepts discussed previously in context, and to illustrate the power of the ontological approach in achieving data organization for the purposes of extracting meaning and knowledge. For simplicity, much detail has been omitted. The key to developing an efficient ontology is to categorize things according to the semantics associated with a given type. Computability must be independent of any concept of a ‘database’ and thus it is essential that these types automatically drive (and conceal) the structure of any relational or other databases used to contain the fields described. In this way, the types can be used by any and all code without direct reliance on or knowledge of a particular implementation.

-   -   Datum 1301—the ancestral type of all persistent storage.     -   Actor 1302—actors 1302 participate in events 1303, perform         actions 1305 on stages 1304 and can be observed 1306.     -   Entity 1308—Any ‘unique’ actor1302 that has motives and/or         behaviors, i.e., that is not passive     -   Country 1315—a country 1315 is a unique kind of         meta-organization with semantics of its own, in particular it         defines the top level stage 1304 within which events 1303 occur         (stages 1304 may of course be nested)     -   Organization 1316—an organization 1316 (probably hierarchical)     -   Person 1317—aperson1317     -   SystemUser 1325—a person 1317 who is a user of the system     -   Widget 1318—an executable item (someone put it there for a         purpose/motive!)     -   Object 1309—A passive non-unique actor 1302, i.e., a thing with         no inherent drives or motives     -   Equipment 1319—An object 1309 that performs some useful function         that can be described and which by so doing increases the range         of actions 1305 available to an Entity1308.     -   Artifact 1320—An object 1309 that has no significant utility,         but is nonetheless of value for some purpose.     -   Stage 1304—This is the platform or environment where events 1303         occur, often a physical location. Stages 1304 are more that just         a place. The nature and history of a stage 1304 determines to a         large extent the behavior and actions 1305 of the Actors 1302         within it. What makes sense in one stage 1304 may not make sense         in another.     -   Action—actions 1305 are the forces that Actors 1302 exert on         each other during an event 1303. All actions 1305 act to move         the actor(s) 1302 involved within a multi-dimensional space         whose axes are the various motivations that an Entity 1308 can         have (greed, power, etc.). By identifying the effect of a given         type of action 1304 along these axes, and, by assigning entities         1308 ‘drives’ along each motivational axis and strategies to         achieve those drives, we can model behavior.     -   Observation—an observation 1306 is a measurement of something         about a Datum 1301, a set of data or an event 1303. Observations         1306 come from sources 1307.     -   General 1310—A general observation 1301 not specifically tied to         a given datum 1301.     -   Report 1321—a report 1321 is a (partial) description from some         perspective generally relating to an Event1303.     -   Story 1326—a news story describing an event 1303.     -   Image 1327—a still image of an event 1303.     -   Sound 1329—a sound recording of an event 1303.     -   Video 1328—a video of an event 1303.     -   Map 1330—a map of an event 1303, stage 1304, or entity 1308.     -   Regarding 1311—an observation regarding a particular datum 1301.     -   Note 1322—a descriptive text note relating to the datum 1301.     -   CrossRef 1323—an explicit one-way cross-reference indicating         some kind of named ‘relationship’ exists between one datum 1301         and another, preferably also specifying ‘weight’ of the         relationship.     -   Delta 1324—an incremental change to all or part of a datum 1301,         this is how the effect of the time axis is handled (a delta 1324         of time or change in time).     -   Relating 1312—A bi-directional link connecting two or more data         together with additional information relating to the link.     -   Source 1307—A source is a logical source of observations 1306 or         other Data.     -   Feed 1313—Most sources 1307 in the system consist of         Client/Server servers that are receiving one or more streams of         observations 1306 of a given type, that is; a newswire server is         a source that outputs observations 1306 of type Story. In the         preferred embodiment, feed sources 1313 are set up and allowed         to run on a continuous basis.     -   Query 1314—sub-type of source 1307 that can be issued at any         time, returning a collection of observations 1306 (or indeed any         Datum 1301 derived type). The Query source type corresponds to         one's normal interpretation of querying a database.     -   Event 1303—An event is the interactions of a set of actors 1302         on a stage 1304. Events 1303 must be reconstructed or predicted         from the observations 1306 that describe them. It is the ability         to predict events 1303 and then to adjust actions 1305 based on         motives (not shown) and strategies that characterizes an entity         1308. It is the purpose of an intelligence system to discover,         analyze and predict the occurrence of events 1303 and to present         those results to a decision maker in order that he can take         Actions 1305. The Actions 1305 of the decision maker then become         a ‘feed’ to the system allowing the model for his strategies to         be refined and thus used to better find opportunities for the         beneficial application of those strategies occurring in the data         stream impinging on the system.

Once the system designer has identified the ontology that is appropriate to allow the system to understand and manipulate the information it is designed to access (in the example above—understanding world events), the next step is to identify what sources of information, published or already acquired, are available to populate the various types defined in the system ontology. From these sources and given the nature of the problem to be solved, the system designed can then define the various fields to be contained in the ontology and the logical relationships between them. This process is expressed through the C* ontology definition and the examples above illustrate how this is done. At the same time, awareness of the desired user interface should be considered when building an ontology via the C* specifications. The final step is to implement any ontology-specific scripts and annotations as described in the Collections Patent. Once all this is done, all that is necessary is to auto-generate all storage tables necessary for the system as described and then begin the process of mining the selected sources into the system.

Having mined the information (a very rapid process), the system designer is free to evolve this ontology as dictated by actual use and by the needs of the system users. Because such changes are automatically and instantaneously reflected throughout the system, the system is now free to rapidly evolve without any of the constraints implied by the Bermuda Triangle problem experienced in the prior art. This software environment can be rapidly changed and extended, predominantly without any need for code modification, according to requirements, and without the fear of introducing new coding errors and bugs in the process. Indeed system modification and extension in this manner is possible by relatively un-skilled (in software terms) customer staff themselves meaning that it no longer requires any involvement from the original system developer. Moreover, this sytem can, through the ontology, unify data from a wide variety of different and incompatible sources and databases into a single whole wherein the data is unified and searchable without consideration of source. These two capabilities have for years been the holy grail of all software development processes, but neither has been achieved—until now.

The foregoing description of the preferred embodiments of the invention has been presented for the purposes of illustration and description. For example, although described with respect to the C programming language, any programming language could be used to implement this invention. Additionally, the claimed system and method should not be limited to the particular API disclosed. The descriptions of the header structures should also not be limited to the embodiments described. While the sample pseudo code provides examples of the code that may be used, the plurality of implementations that could in fact be developed is nearly limitless. For these reasons, this description is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise form disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teaching. It is intended that the scope of the invention be limited not by this detailed description, but rather by the claims appended hereto. 

1. A system for the extraction of data from a variety of sources into a single unifying ontology, comprising: a) an ontology based environment, such environment including an ontology description language (ODL) and a run-time accessible types system; b) logically connected thereto, an extensible parsing environment, wherein such parsing environment supports customized reverse-polish plug-in operators; c) logically connected thereto, a configurable outer parser capable of accepting a BNF (or equivalent) specification describing the source data format; d) an embedded inner parser capable of executing statements and performing actions directly on the objects and types described by the system ontology.
 2. The system of claim 1, further comprising a memory system logically connected thereto, for storing and managing persistent data being processed by the system.
 3. The system of claim 1, wherein the ontology-based environment is the ontology environment described in the Ontology Patent.
 4. The system of claim 1, wherein the run-time accessible types system is the run-time accessible types system described in the Types Patent.
 5. The system of claim 1, wherein the parsing environment is the parsing environment described in the Parse Patent.
 6. The system of claim 2, wherein the memory system uses the memory system and model described in the Memory Patent.
 7. The system of claim 1, wherein the outer parser is capable of accepting a BNF specification containing specifications for embedded plug-ins.
 8. The system of claim 7, wherein the outer parser is capable of accepting a BNF specification containing specification(s) for embedded plug-ins that are passed textual strings consisting of interpretable source statements.
 9. The system of claim 7, wherein the embedded inner parser is capable of being invoked by one or more the plug-in(s) in the outer parser, wherein the specification for such plug-ins is stored in the BNF specification.
 10. The system of claim 1, further comprising a line processor function, wherein such function permits pre-examination and alteration of the lines appearing in the source data before such data is processed by the parser.
 11. The system of claim 2, further comprising one or more post-processor functions (munchers), wherein such munchers are registered on the system and are able to perform arbitrary operations on a collection of extracted ontological records prior to their instantiation into persistent storage by the memory system.
 12. The system of claim 1, wherein both parsers are logically connected to a common environment, wherein such comment environment contains a set of assignable and readable registers whose type adapts automatically to any data item assigned to such registers and which registers are persistent in the common environment so that they may be used to store the current state of the parsers.
 13. The system of claim 1, wherein system can be invoked to mine data from a given source based on actions in a user interface.
 14. The system of claim 1, wherein the system can be registered with a running server process connected to a data source in order to allow that server to extract ontological information from the data source on a continuous un-attended basis.
 15. A method for the extracting data from a variety of sources into a single unifying ontology, comprising the steps of: a) receiving source data; b) parsing the source format with an outer parser, wherein such outer parser includes an embedded parser for an interpreted ontology description language (ODL); c) parsing the source data with the outer parser and embedded parser using the parsed source format; d) passing statements in an embedded language to the embedded parser; e) responsive to one or more actions by the outer parser, executing one or more statements in the embedded language.
 16. The method of claim 15, wherein the step of parsing includes the step of receiving a BNF specification.
 17. The method of claim 16, wherein the step of parsing includes the step of receiving a BNF specification that includes specifications for embedded plug-ins.
 18. The method of claim 17, further comprising the step of passing one or more textual strings to the embedded plug-ins specified in the received BNF specification.
 19. The method of claim 18, wherein the step of passing one or more textual strings to the embedded plug-ins includes passing interpretable ODL statements.
 20. The method of claim 18, further comprising the step of executing one or more statements ODL statements.
 21. The method of claim 20, wherein the step of executing one or more statements comprises ordering the execution of such statements based on the progress of the step of parsing.
 22. The method of claim 15, further comprising the step of altering the source data before such data is parsed by the parsers.
 23. The method of claim 15, further comprising the step of creating a collection of ontological records.
 24. The method of claim 23, further comprising the step of instantiating the collection of ontological records created by the method into persistent storage.
 25. The method of claim 24, further comprising the step of registering one or more munchers on the system, wherein such munchers are able to perform arbitrary operations on the collection of ontological records prior to their instantiation into persistent storage
 26. The method of claim 15, further comprising the step of registering the method with a server process connected to a data source, such that the server process is able to extract ontological information from the data source on a continuous un-attended basis. 